Roller Derby Test O'Matic

Turn left and learn the 2013 rules.

Here are all the questions currently in the database.

1.1 What is the maximum number of skaters in a team (as oppose to a roster)?

  1. 16
  2. 14
  3. 12
  4. Unlimited
  5. 10
  6. 18
  7. 20 [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/1.1

1.1 What is the maximum number of skaters will a Women Flat Track Derby Association Team consist?

  1. 14
  2. 16
  3. 20 [Correct]
  4. 18
  5. 12

1.1 All skaters on a team must have passed ...

  1. Minimum Skill Requirements [Correct]
  2. GCSEs
  3. wind
  4. The Cycling Proficiency Test

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/1.1

1.1 True or False: All skaters on a team must have passed the Minimum Skill Requirements

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/1.1

1.2 A WFTDA sanctioned team, "H.a.R.D.", is creating their roster for an upcoming bout. The bout is still four weeks away, so the decide to roster 16 skaters including 2 alternates. Based on WFTDA rules, is there anything wrong with this setup?

  1. No [Correct]
  2. Yes
  3. Very likely
  4. Very unlikely
  5. Most definitely

1.2 True or False: Teams are allow to rotate their game and team roster between bouts.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

1.2 True or False: Leagues may rotate their game roster from their team roster between games

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/1.2

1.2 At most, how many skaters can be on the roster for a specific game?

  1. 14 [Correct]
  2. 12
  3. 16
  4. 18
  5. 20
  6. 5
  7. 6
  8. 7

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/1.2

2.1.1 The method of marking dimensions (tape, rope, etc), including suggested ten (10) foot marks, is ...

  1. subject to the restrictions of the venue [Correct]
  2. clearly defined and mandatory
  3. allowed to be made of fire

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.1 The method of marking dimensions (tape, rope, etc), including suggested 10 foot (3 meter) marks, is ...

  1. subject to the restrictions of the venue [Correct]
  2. clearly defined and mandatory
  3. allowed to be made of fire

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.1 10 foot (3 meter) track intervals are ...

  1. mandatory.
  2. discouraged.
  3. suggested, subject to the restrictions of the venue. [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.2 Which of these is an acceptable surface for the track?

  1. Rough concrete
  2. Kittens
  3. Game court [Correct]
  4. Wood [Correct]
  5. Polished concrete [Correct]
  6. Painted concrete [Correct]
  7. Unpolished wood
  8. Carpet
  9. Rough tarmac

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.2.1 True or False: The skating surface and boundary lines don't need to have a particularly high contrast with each other.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1.2

2.1.2.1 What is the definition of high contrast with regards to the skating surface?

  1. The skating surface is a light color and the boundary line is red
  2. There is a large degree of visual difference between the boundary line and the base color of the skating surface such that the boundary line color stands out from the skating surface [Correct]
  3. The boundary line and the base color of the skating surface are different shades of the same color
  4. There is a small degree of visual difference between the boundary line and the base color of the skating surface such that the boundary line color is just about visible from the skating surface

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1.2

2.1.3 Which of these is the lower limit on the height of the track boundaries?

  1. 0.05 inch (0.13 cm)
  2. 0.50 inch (1.27 cm)
  3. 0.30 inch (0.76 cm)
  4. 0.15 inch (0.38 cm)
  5. 0.25 inch (0.64 cm) [Correct]
  6. 0.20 inch (0.50 cm)
  7. 0.10 inch (0.25 cm)
  8. Flat

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.3 Which of these is the upper limit on the height of the track boundaries

  1. 2 inches (5 cm) [Correct]
  2. 1 inch (2.54 cm)
  3. 3 inches (7.5 cm)
  4. 1.5 inches (3.81 cm)
  5. 2.5 inches (6.3 cm)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.3 Which of these is a legal height for the track boundaries:

  1. Flat
  2. 0.5 inch (1.27 cm) [Correct]
  3. 1 inch (2.54 cm) [Correct]
  4. 1.5 inch (3.81 cm) [Correct]
  5. Anything above 0.25 inch (0.64 cm) and below 2 inches (5 cm) [Correct]
  6. 2.5 inches (6.3 cm)
  7. 0.2 inches (0.50 cm)
  8. 5 inches (13 cm)
  9. 2.2 inches (5.9 cm)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.3 How wide must the track boundary line be:

  1. At least 3 inch (7.5 cm) and no greater than 4 inches (10 cm)
  2. At least 2 inch (5 cm) and no greater than 3 inches (7.5 cm)
  3. At least 2 inch (5 cm) and no greater than 4 inches (10 cm)
  4. At least 1 inch (2.54 cm) and no greater than 5 inches (13 cm)
  5. At least 1 inch (2.54 cm) and no greater than 4 inches (10 cm)
  6. At least 1 inch (2.54 cm) and no greater than 3 inches (7.5 cm) [Correct]
  7. At least 2 inch (5 cm) and no greater than 5 inches (13 cm)
  8. At least 3 inch (7.5 cm) and no greater than 5 inches (13 cm)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.3 Which of these is the upper limit on the height of the track boundaries

  1. 2 inches [Correct]
  2. 1 inch
  3. 3 inches
  4. 1.5 inches
  5. 2.5 inches

2.1.3 True or False: the track boundary must be flat

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.3 Which of these is the lower limit on the height of the track boundaries?

  1. 0.10 inch
  2. 0.20 inch
  3. 0.25 inch [Correct]
  4. 0.15 inch
  5. 0.30 inch
  6. 0.50 inch
  7. 0.05 inch
  8. Flat

2.1.3 How wide must the track boundary line be:

  1. At least 3 inch and no greater than 4 inches
  2. At least 2 inch and no greater than 3 inches
  3. At least 2 inch and no greater than 4 inches
  4. At least 1 inch and no greater than 5 inches
  5. At least 1 inch and no greater than 4 inches
  6. At least 1 inch and no greater than 3 inches [Correct]
  7. At least 2 inch and no greater than 5 inches
  8. At least 3 inch and no greater than 5 inches

2.1.3 Which of these is a legal height for the track boundaries:

  1. Flat
  2. 0.5 inch [Correct]
  3. 1 inch [Correct]
  4. 1.5 inch [Correct]
  5. Anything above 0.25 inch and below 2 inches [Correct]
  6. 2.5 inches
  7. 0.2 inches
  8. 5 inches
  9. 2.2 inches

2.1.3 True or False: As long as the track boundary is within the legal limits, it does not have to be consistent in height or width.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.3.1 True or False: Sponsor logos are permitted on the Pivot and Jammer lines even if logo interferes with the contrast of the line to the skating surface.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1.3

2.1.3.1 The Pivot and Jammer start lines must be

  1. At least 2 inch and no greater than 3 inches in width
  2. At least 3 inch and no greater than 4 inches in width
  3. At least 2 inch and no greater than 5 inches in width
  4. At least 3 inch and no greater than 5 inches in width
  5. At least 2 inch and no greater than 4 inches in width
  6. At least 1 inch and no greater than 5 inches in width
  7. At least 1 inch and no greater than 4 inches in width
  8. At least 1 inch and no greater than 3 inches in width [Correct]

2.1.3.1 True or False: Sponsor logos are permitted on the Pivot and Jammer lines.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1.3

2.1.3.1 The Pivot and Jammer start lines must be

  1. Clearly different, and consistent in colour [Correct]
  2. Clearly different, and inconsistent in colour
  3. Indistinguishable

2.1.3.1 The Pivot and Jammer start lines must be

  1. At least 2 inch (5 cm) and no greater than 3 inches (7.5 cm) in width
  2. At least 3 inch (7.5 cm) and no greater than 4 inches (10 cm) in width
  3. At least 2 inch (5 cm) and no greater than 5 inches (13 cm) in width
  4. At least 3 inch (7.5 cm) and no greater than 5 inches (13 cm) in width
  5. At least 2 inch (5 cm) and no greater than 4 inches (10 cm) in width
  6. At least 1 inch (2.54 cm) and no greater than 5 inches (13 cm) in width
  7. At least 1 inch (2.54 cm) and no greater than 4 inches (10 cm) in width
  8. At least 1 inch (2.54 cm) and no greater than 3 inches (7.5 cm) in width [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1.3

2.1.3.2 Ten (10) foot track intervals are ...

  1. strongly encouraged [Correct]
  2. strongly discouraged
  3. for wimps
  4. forbidden
  5. mandatory

2.1.4 Chairs or benches in designated team areas can be ...

  1. only on the sidelines
  2. only in the infield
  3. on the sidelines or in the infield [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.4 True or False: Skaters on the team but not the roster may sit or stand in the designated team area during a bout.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.4 How many support staff are allowed in the designated team area during a bout?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4
  5. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.5 How large a clearance must there be around the track for safety (assuming no rail, wall or barrier between the track and the crowd)

  1. Just enough for the referees to fit through
  2. 10 feet (3 meters) [Correct]
  3. 5 feet (1.5 meters)
  4. 7.5 feet (2.3 meters)
  5. 15 feet (4.6 meters)
  6. 20 feet (6 meters)
  7. 0 feet (0 m) / no distance

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.5 True or False: In some situations the clearance between the track and the crowd can be less than 5 feet (1.5 meters).

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.5 If there is a rail, wall or barrier between the track and the crowd, how much safety clearance is permissible?

  1. 7.5 feet (2.3 meters)
  2. 2.5 feet (0.8 meters)
  3. Just enough for the referees to get past
  4. No distance
  5. 10 feet (3 meters)
  6. 5 feet (1.5 meters) [Correct]
  7. 15 feet (4.6 meters)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.5 True or False: In some situations the clearance between the track and the crowd can be less than 5 feet.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

2.1.5 How large a clearance must there be around the track for safety (assuming no rail, wall or barrier between the track and the crowd)

  1. 10 feet [Correct]
  2. 5 feet
  3. 7.5 feet
  4. 15 feet
  5. 20 feet
  6. 0 feet (no distance)
  7. Just enough for the referees to fit through

2.1.5 If there is a rail, wall or barrier between the track and the crowd, how much safety clearance is permissible?

  1. 5 feet [Correct]
  2. 10 feet
  3. No distance
  4. Just enough for the referees to get past
  5. 2.5 feet
  6. 7.5 feet
  7. 15 feet

2.1.6 Which of these reasons is the most accurate description of why the track surface, boundaries, safety zone, and penalty box must be clearly lit?

  1. So the spectators can see
  2. For safety and visibility [Correct]
  3. So make-up can easily be applied
  4. To prevent shadows distracting players

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.7 True or False: The track and the boundary marker line are considered out of bounds.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.1.7 The track and the boundary marker line are...

  1. considered in bounds [Correct]
  2. considered out of bounds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.1

2.2.1 How many teams are in a bout or game?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4
  5. Unlimited

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.2

2.2.1 How many minutes are in a period?

  1. 30 [Correct]
  2. 60
  3. 45
  4. 2
  5. 90
  6. 10
  7. 15

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.2

2.2.1 How many minutes of play in a bout or game

  1. 60 [Correct]
  2. 90
  3. 20
  4. 30
  5. 2
  6. 75

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.2

2.2.2 Which team wins the game out of these options:

  1. The best dressed team
  2. The team with the highest score [Correct]
  3. The team with the fewest fouls
  4. The team which went fastest
  5. The team with the lowest score

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.2

2.2.2 True or False: The team with the most points at the end of the game wins.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.2

2.2.3 A "double-header" event is...

  1. One event with two or more teams
  2. One event with two teams
  3. Two or more games combined into one event [Correct]

2.2.3 During a "double-header" event, games ...

  1. Can be staggered by periods [Correct]
  2. Can be staggered by jams
  3. Must be played one at a time to completion

2.3.1 The period begins when ...

  1. the designated Official blows the jam-starting whistle [Correct]
  2. both jammers are ready
  3. somebody blows the jam-starting whistle
  4. both teams are ready and on track
  5. both pivots are on track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.1 The signal to begin a period is

  1. Four short whistle blasts
  2. One long whistle blast
  3. Two long whistle blasts
  4. Four long whistle blasts
  5. One short whistle blast [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.1 The period begins when ...

  1. the designated Official blows the first jam whistle [Correct]
  2. both jammers are ready
  3. somebody blows the first jam whistle
  4. both teams are ready and on track
  5. both pivots are on track

2.3.1 The signal to begin a period is

  1. Four short whistle blasts
  2. One long whistle blast [Correct]
  3. Two long whistle blasts
  4. Four long whistle blasts
  5. One short whistle blast

2.3.2 When the clock reaches 0:00 at the end of a period, what happens?

  1. The jam is allowed to reach its natural conclusion [Correct]
  2. The jam stops immediately

2.3.2 Why is there a break between periods?

  1. To allow referee rotation [Correct]
  2. If applicable, to allow for skater warm-up [Correct]
  3. To sell merchandise to the crowd
  4. So the skaters can use the bathroom
  5. So skaters don't get too tired
  6. To give the hard-working NSO's a break
  7. To allow for a kit check
  8. There is an official time out

2.3.2 How long is the break between periods?

  1. At least 5 minutes [Correct]
  2. Any amount of time
  3. At least 10 minutes
  4. At least 15 minutes
  5. At least 2 minutes

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.3 True or False: A period may extend past the point when the period clock reaches 0:00.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.3 The period clock counts in which direction:

  1. Up
  2. Down [Correct]

2.3.3 When does a period end?

  1. When the last jam reaches its natural conclusion [Correct]
  2. When the period clock reaches 0:00

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.4 True or False: If there is 30 seconds or less on the period clock when a jam ends, there will not be another jam started for that period (assuming no timeouts are called).

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.4 If thirty (30) seconds or fewer remain on the period clock when a jam ends (and it does not end prior to its natural conclusion), will there be another jam started for that period?

  1. At the discretion of the head referee
  2. Only if a timeout is called [Correct]
  3. One final jam is played
  4. No further jams are played in the period

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.4 How many seconds (minimum) must be on the period clock at the end of a jam for a new jam to start for a given period (assuming no timeouts are called).

  1. 31 [Correct]
  2. 21
  3. 11
  4. 41
  5. 51
  6. 61
  7. 121
  8. 30
  9. 20
  10. 60

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.3.4 True or False: As long as the official period clock is not at 0:00 when a jam ends, there will be another jam started in that period (assuming no timeouts are called).

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.3

2.4.1 A period is divided into multiple...

  1. Jams [Correct]
  2. Games
  3. Bouts
  4. Slices
  5. Timeouts
  6. Laps

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.4.1 The limit on the number of jams allowed for each period is

  1. There is no limit [Correct]
  2. 30
  3. 100
  4. 200
  5. 90

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.4.2 Jams end on ...

  1. The first whistle of the jam-ending signal
  2. The last whistle of the jam-ending signal [Correct]
  3. The second whistle of the jam-ending signal

2.4.2 What is the longest length of time a jam can last?

  1. 1.5 minutes
  2. 3 minutes
  3. 1 minute
  4. 2 minutes [Correct]

2.4.3 How much time is there between jams (assuming these are not overtime jams)?

  1. As long as it takes to get the jammers in position
  2. 1 minute
  3. 30 seconds [Correct]
  4. 20 seconds
  5. 10 seconds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.4.4 If a skater is on the track but not in position on their start whistle what happens?

  1. As long as they start behind the Pivot line, nothing
  2. They are not allowed to take part in this jam and the team skates short
  3. They are subject to false start penalties [Correct]
  4. For each member not in position the opposing team gains a point

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.4.4 What happens if some skaters are not ready to start the next jam after the allotted time?

  1. A timeout is called
  2. The jam starts without them and they can join when ready
  3. An extra 30 seconds is given to the skaters to get into position
  4. The jam starts without them and the team skates short for that jam [Correct]

2.4.4 What happens if a skater does not make it onto the track by the time the Jam starts?

  1. The skater is permitted to join the Jam anyway.
  2. The skater is not permitted to join the Jam, and receives a Penalty.
  3. The skater is not permitted to join the Jam, and does not receive a Penalty. [Correct]
  4. The Jam is called off.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.4.4.1 What clause allows Jammers to put on their helmet covers after the jam has started?

  1. Each Jammer may have their helmet cover in hand before the jam-starting whistle [Correct]
  2. As long as the Jammer has the helmet cover on when they begin scoring points they do not have to wear their helmet cover
  3. None, the helmet cover must be worn when the jam starts

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.1 Jammers are considered in position and ready if they are ...

  1. in bounds when first whistle of the jam is blown [Correct]
  2. in bounds when second whistle of the jam is blown
  3. on track
  4. clearly seen to have a star on their helmet

2.4.4.1 Jammers are considered in position and ready if they are ...

  1. in bounds when first whistle of the jam is blown with their helmet cover in hand or on their helmet [Correct]
  2. on track
  3. clearly seen to have a star on their helmet

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.1 If a jam has started, under what situation may a helmet cover enter the jam in progress?

  1. If the Pivot is the skater bringing the helmet cover into the jam
  2. If neither team has a helmet cover currently in the jam
  3. If there is no helmet cover currently in the jam
  4. None, the helmet cover cannot enter a jam in progress [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.1 What clause allows Jammers to put on their helmet covers after the jam has started?

  1. As long as the Jammer has the helmet cover on when they begin scoring points they do not have to wear their helmet cover
  2. Each Jammer must have their helmet cover in hand before the Jammer start whistle
  3. None, the helmet cover must be worn when the jam starts
  4. Each Jammer must have their helmet cover in hand before the jam starting whistle [Correct]

Note: The "jam starting whistle" is the signal to the blockers (one blast), the "Jammer start whistle" is the signal to the Jammers (two blasts)

2.4.4.1 If Jammers are in bounds but not on or behind the Jammer line at the Jammer start whistle ...

  1. they get no penalties as long as they were on or behind the Jammer line when the whistle to start the pack rolling is blown
  2. They are subject to false start penalties [Correct]
  3. The opposing Jammer automatically becomes Lead Jammer
  4. They must return to their bench

2.4.4.1 True or False: Jammers are permitted to put on their helmet covers after the jam has started.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.1 If Jammers are in bounds but not on or behind the Jammer line at the jam-start whistle ...

  1. They recieve no penalties as long as they were on or behind the Jammer line when the pack has crossed the Pivot line
  2. They are subject to false start penalties [Correct]
  3. The opposing Jammer automatically becomes Lead Jammer
  4. They must return to their bench

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.1.1 If the Jammer is not on the track when the jam starting whistle blows ...

  1. The Jammer will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and no penalty will be issued [Correct]
  2. The Jammer will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and a false start penalty will be issued
  3. The Jammer can join the jam at the Jammer start whistle
  4. The Pivot becomes the Jammer
  5. The Jammer can join the jam once the pack has completed one full lap
  6. The Jammer can join the jam once there is a Lead Jammer in the jam

2.4.4.1.1 If the Jammer is not on the track and entirely in bounds when the jam-starting whistle blows ...

  1. The Jammer will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and no penalty will be issued [Correct]
  2. The Jammer will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and a false start penalty will be issued
  3. The Jammer can join the jam
  4. The Pivot becomes the Jammer
  5. The Jammer can join the jam once the pack has completed one full lap
  6. The Jammer can join the jam once there is a Lead Jammer in the jam

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.2 Pivots and Blockers are considered in position and ready if ...

  1. They are entirely in bounds when the jam-start whistle blows [Correct]
  2. They are at least partially in bounds when the jam-start whistle blows
  3. They are somewhere on track
  4. They can reach each member of their team with an outstretched arm

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.2 A Pivot must have their helmet cover where at the start of the jam?

  1. On their helmet or in their hand [Correct]
  2. On their helmet or in the hand of a member of the team
  3. On their helmet or somewhere on track
  4. On their helmet or in the hand of the Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.2 True or False: Pivots are not permitted to put on their helmet covers after the jam has started.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.2 Pivots and Blockers are considered in position and ready if ...

  1. They are in bounds when the first whistle of the jam blows [Correct]
  2. They are wearing correct skates and safety equipment
  3. They are somewhere on track
  4. They can reach each member of their team with an outstretched arm

2.4.4.2 If Pivots and Blockers are on track but not in position when the first whistle of the jam blows ...

  1. They are subject to false start penalties [Correct]
  2. They must sit out this jam and the team skates down
  3. There are no penalties

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.4.2.1 If a Pivot or Blocker is not on the track when the jam starting whistle blows ...

  1. The Pivot or Blocker can join the jam once there is a Lead Jammer in the jam
  2. The Pivot or Blocker will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and no penalty will be issued [Correct]
  3. The Jammer becomes the Pivot or missing Blocker
  4. The Pivot or Blocker will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and a false start penalty will be issued
  5. The Pivot or Blocker can join the jam once the pack has completed one full lap

2.4.4.2.1 If a Pivot or Blocker is not on the track when the jam-starting whistle blows ...

  1. The Pivot or Blocker can join the jam once the pack has completed one full lap
  2. The Jammer becomes the Pivot or missing Blocker
  3. The Pivot or Blocker will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and a false start penalty will be issued
  4. The Pivot or Blocker will not be permitted to join the jam in progress and no penalty will be issued [Correct]
  5. The Pivot or Blocker can join the jam once there is a Lead Jammer in the jam

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4.4

2.4.5 True or False: The jam ends on the last of four whistle blasts.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.4.5 If an official calls off the jam accidentally ...

  1. The jam is over [Correct]
  2. The jam continues
  3. A time out is automatically called

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.4.5 True or False: The jam ends on the first whistle blast in a set of four.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.4

2.5.1 How long is the regroup time before an overtime jam?

  1. 30 seconds
  2. 1 minute [Correct]
  3. 2 minutes
  4. 5 minutes
  5. 10 minutes
  6. 15 minutes

2.5.1 Does an overtime jam have a Lead Jammer?

  1. No [Correct]
  2. Yes

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5

2.5.1 During an overtime jam, Jammers start scoring points on which pass through the pack?

  1. Third
  2. Fourth
  3. Second
  4. First (Initial) [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5

2.5.1 If the score is tied after an overtime jam, what happens?

  1. The game is declared a tie
  2. Additional overtime games are played until the tie is broken
  3. Additional overtime jams are played until the tie is broken [Correct]
  4. Additional overtime periods are played until the tie is broken
  5. The Jammers play Rock, Paper, Scissors.
  6. The home team wins.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5

2.5.1 If the score is tied at the end of a bout what happens?

  1. Additional overtime jams are played until the tie is broken [Correct]
  2. Additional overtime periods are played until the tie is broken
  3. The bout is a tie
  4. Additional overtime games are played until the tie is broken

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5

2.5.1 How much time is given between overtime jams?

  1. 30 seconds
  2. 45 seconds
  3. 1 minute [Correct]
  4. 2 minutes
  5. 5 minutes

Note: There's 30 seconds between normal jams, but a full minute between overtime jams.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5

2.5.1 If the score is tied at the end of a bout what happens?

  1. A final overtime jam starts and determines the winner [Correct]
  2. A final overtime period starts and determines the winner
  3. The bout is a tie
  4. A final overtime game starts and determines the winner

Note: If it's still a tie after the "final" overtime jam, additional overtime jams are played until there is a winner.

2.5.1 An overtime jam lasts how long?

  1. 1 minute
  2. 2 minutes or until the Lead Jammer calls off the jam
  3. 2 minutes [Correct]
  4. Until one team scores 5 points

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5

2.5.1.1 If an overtime jam ends before 2 minutes has passed, what happens?

  1. The score for that jam is discounted and another overtime jam is played.
  2. The score stands and another overtime jam is played.
  3. The score stands and additional overtime jams are played only if the scores are tied or at the Head Referee's discretion. [Correct]
  4. The game is a tie
  5. The score stands and if the scores for each team are the same, the game is a tie

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5.1

2.5.1.1 If an overtime jam ends before 2 minutes has passed, what happens?

  1. The score stands and additional overtime jams are played only if the scores are tied [Correct]
  2. The score stands and another overtime jam is played
  3. The score for that jam is discounted and another overtime jam is played
  4. The game is a tie
  5. The score stands and if the scores for each team are the same, the game is a tie

2.5.2 Is overtime a new period or an extension of the second period?

  1. A new period
  2. An extension of the second period [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.5

2.6.1 How many timeouts is each team allowed?

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3 [Correct]
  4. 4
  5. 5
  6. Unlimited

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.1 How long is a team timeout?

  1. 3 minutes
  2. 2 minutes
  3. 1 minute [Correct]
  4. As long as the team wants
  5. 30 seconds
  6. 5 minutes
  7. 10 minutes
  8. 20 seconds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.2 True or False: Only a referee can start (signal for the clock to stop) a team timeout.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Note: When the Captain or Designated Alternate makes the T signal with their hand, they're requesting (not starting) a team timeout

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.2 Which two people per Team are allowed to call for a Timeout?

  1. Captain and Designated Alternate. [Correct]
  2. Pivot from last Jam and Designated Alternate.
  3. Captain and Pivot from last Jam.
  4. Pivot and Jammer from last Jam.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.2 True or False: A team timeout begins when a Captain or Designated Alternative makes a T signal with their hands

  1. False, this is only a request for a Timeout [Correct]
  2. True, this is the start of a Timeout

Note: The timeout is requested by a Captain or Designated Alternative and is started by a referee

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.2 What does a Captain or Designated Alternative making a T signal with their hands indicate?

  1. A team timeout is starting
  2. Team timeout request [Correct]
  3. Tea break
  4. A team timeout is over

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.3 When can teams request timeouts?

  1. When a serious penalty has been issued during a jam
  2. Any time during a bout
  3. Between jams [Correct]
  4. During a timeout

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.3 When can teams request timeouts?

  1. When a serious penalty has been issued during a jam
  2. After the first whistle has blown to start the jam but before the jammer whistle
  3. Any time during a bout
  4. Between jams [Correct]
  5. During a timeout

2.6.3.1 True or False: After a timeout there must be 30 seconds before the next jam starts

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6.3

2.6.3.1 At the conclusion of a timeout, what is the longest time to wait until the next jam starts (assume these are regular jams, not overtime jams)?

  1. As long as necessary
  2. 30 seconds [Correct]
  3. 10 seconds
  4. 1 minute
  5. 20 seconds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6.3

2.6.4 When can a referee call an Official Timeout?

  1. Only between jams
  2. Only during a jam
  3. At any point [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.4 True or False: Referees can only call an Official Timeout between jams and not during a jam in progress.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.6.4.1 If a referee calls an Official Timeout during a jam, what happens?

  1. The jam will end and a new jam will (if possible) start after the timeout [Correct]
  2. The jam will pause and resume after the timeout
  3. The jam will be stopped and replayed after the timeout
  4. The Official Timeout will happen after the jam has ended

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6.4

2.6.5 When does the period clock resume after a timeout?

  1. When the Timeout finishes
  2. When the next jam starts [Correct]
  3. It doesn't stop

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.6

2.7.1 The penalty box's benches or seats must be able to accommodate ...

  1. Three players from each team [Correct]
  2. Six players from each team
  3. As many players as possible
  4. Six players (regardless of team)
  5. Four players from each team

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.7

2.7.2 The penalty benches must be ...

  1. easily accessible [Correct]
  2. in a neutral area [Correct]
  3. close to the track [Correct]
  4. hard to get to
  5. far from the track
  6. comfortable
  7. close to the home team's benches

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.7

2.7.2 True or False: There can be two penalty boxes, one for each team.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.7

2.8.1 With relation to the penalty clock, jam clock and period clock ...

  1. there must be a separate clock for all three purposes [Correct]
  2. one clock may be used for all three purposes

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8

2.8.2 The official period clock stops...

  1. between each jam but not during timeouts
  2. only when a timeout is called or when more than 30 seconds has elapsed between jams [Correct]
  3. between each jam and during timeouts
  4. only when a timeout is called

2.8.2.1 The official period clock stops...

  1. between each jam but not during timeouts
  2. when a timeout is called [Correct]
  3. between each jam and during timeouts

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.2

2.8.2.1 When does the official period clock start?

  1. on the first whistle of the first jam [Correct]
  2. when both teams are ready and before the kit check
  3. once the audience are seated
  4. as the skaters are lining up before the first jam

2.8.2.1 When does the official period clock start?

  1. on the jam-starting whistle of the first jam [Correct]
  2. when both teams are ready and before the kit check
  3. once the audience are seated
  4. as the skaters are lining up before the first jam

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.2

2.8.2.3 The official period clock stops...

  1. during the line up time between each jam, but it starts again if the time exceeds 30 seconds
  2. during the line up time between each jam
  3. when the line up time between jams exceeds 30 seconds [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.2

2.8.2.3 True or False: The official period clock is stopped if more than 30 seconds has passed between jams

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.2

2.8.2.4 The official period clock must be highly visible to ...

  1. Only teams and fans
  2. Referees, teams and fans [Correct]
  3. Only referees and teams
  4. Only referees
  5. Only Referees and fans

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.2

2.8.3.1 When does the official jam clock start?

  1. On the first whistle of the jam [Correct]
  2. As soon as the previous jam has ended
  3. On the last whistle of the jam

2.8.3.1 When does the official jam clock start?

  1. On the jam-starting whistle [Correct]
  2. As soon as the previous jam has ended
  3. Once a Jammer has earned Lead Jammer status

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.3

2.8.3.2 When does the official jam clock stop?

  1. At the end of the jam on the first whistle
  2. At the end of the jam on the fourth whistle [Correct]
  3. At the start of the jam
  4. Only during timeouts

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.3

2.8.3.3 The official jam clock must be highly visible to ...

  1. Only referees
  2. Only referees and teams
  3. Referees, teams and fans [Correct]
  4. Only teams and fans
  5. Only Referees and fans

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.3

2.8.4.1 How many penalty clocks must a game have?

  1. Enough to time all penalties simultaneously [Correct]
  2. 1
  3. 2
  4. 3
  5. None
  6. 6

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.4

2.8.4.2 When do penalty clocks stop?

  1. They don't stop until they reach 0:00
  2. Between jams [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.4

2.8.4.3 True or false: penalty clocks must be visible to referees, teams and fans.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.4

2.8.4.3 When in the Penalty Box, players may ...

  1. not know how much penalty time they have remaining
  2. request knowledge of how much penalty time they have remaining [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.8.4

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Jam Start

  1. One long blast
  2. Two rapid blasts
  3. None
  4. Four rapid blasts
  5. Four long blasts
  6. One short blast [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.9

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Lead Jammer

  1. Four long blasts
  2. Four rapid blasts
  3. None
  4. Two rapid blasts [Correct]
  5. One long blast

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.9

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Jammer start

  1. Four long blasts
  2. Four rapid blasts
  3. None
  4. Two rapid blasts [Correct]
  5. One long blast

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Minor Penalty

  1. Four long blasts
  2. Four rapid blasts
  3. None [Correct]
  4. Two rapid blasts
  5. One long blast

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Fourth Minor Penalty

  1. Four long blasts
  2. Four rapid blasts
  3. None
  4. Two rapid blasts
  5. One long blast [Correct]

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Jam Called Off/Ended

  1. Four long blasts
  2. Four rapid blasts [Correct]
  3. None
  4. Two rapid blasts
  5. One long blast

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.9

2.9 What does the whistle signal of two rapid blasts mean:

  1. Jam Start – Pack start
  2. Jam Start – Jammer start [Correct]
  3. Lead Jammer [Correct]
  4. Minor Penalty
  5. Fourth Minor Penalty
  6. Game Called Off/Ended
  7. Major Penalty
  8. Jam Called Off/Ended

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Jam Start - Pack start

  1. Four long blasts
  2. Four rapid blasts
  3. None
  4. Two rapid blasts
  5. One long blast [Correct]

2.9 What does the whistle signal of one long blast mean?

  1. Jam Start – Pack start [Correct]
  2. Jam Start – Jammer start
  3. Lead Jammer
  4. Minor Penalty
  5. Fourth Minor Penalty [Correct]
  6. Game Called Off/Ended
  7. Major Penalty [Correct]
  8. Jam Called Off/Ended

2.9 What does the whistle signal of two rapid blasts mean:

  1. Jam Start
  2. Lead Jammer [Correct]
  3. Game Called Off/Ended
  4. Major Penalty
  5. Jam Called Off/Ended

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.9

2.9 What is the whistle signal for: Major Penalty

  1. Four long blasts
  2. Four rapid blasts
  3. None
  4. Two rapid blasts
  5. One long blast [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.9

2.9 What does the whistle signal of four rapid blasts mean:

  1. Jam Start
  2. Lead Jammer
  3. Game Called Off/Ended
  4. Major Penalty
  5. Jam Called Off/Ended [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.9

2.9 What does the whistle signal of four rapid blasts mean:

  1. Jam Start – Pack start
  2. Jam Start – Jammer start
  3. Lead Jammer
  4. Minor Penalty
  5. Fourth Minor Penalty
  6. Game Called Off/Ended
  7. Major Penalty
  8. Jam Called Off/Ended [Correct]

2.9 What does the whistle signal of one long blast mean?

  1. Jam Called Off/Ended
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Game Called Off/Ended
  4. Lead Jammer
  5. Jam Start

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/2.9

3 With regards to player position:

  1. Skaters are not limited in the number of positions they can play during a bout, and can only play both Jammer and Pivot position at a time
  2. Skaters have to pick the position they are going to play during a bout
  3. Skaters are not limited in the number of positions they can play during a bout, and can play many positions at a time
  4. Skaters are not limited in the number of positions they can play during a bout, and can only play one position at a time [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3

3 The maximum number of Blockers who may be a Pivot from each team allowed on track during play is:

  1. 6
  2. Unlimited
  3. 5
  4. 4
  5. 3
  6. 2
  7. 1 [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3

3 The maximum number of Blockers from each team allowed on track during play is:

  1. 2
  2. 3
  3. 4 [Correct]
  4. 5
  5. Unlimited
  6. 6

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3

3 Player positions refer to ...

  1. where a skater is on the track during a given jam.
  2. the position a skater is sitting in.
  3. the position a skater is playing in a given jam. [Correct]
  4. where a skater is on the track during a bout.
  5. the position a skater is skating in.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3

3 The maximum number of Jammers from each team allowed on track during play is:

  1. 2
  2. 3
  3. 4
  4. 5
  5. Unlimited
  6. 6
  7. 1 [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3

3.1.1 Where do Blockers generally line up?

  1. Behind the Jammers but in front of the Pivots
  2. In front of the Jammers and the Pivots
  3. Anywhere in front of the Jammers
  4. Behind both the Jammers and the Pivots
  5. Behind the Pivots but in front of the Jammers [Correct]

Note: Most of the time Pivots and Blockers mingle on the track together, however the rules still favour the tradition of Blockers lining up behind Pivots

3.1.1 True or False: Blockers can score points.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.1

3.1.2 What do Non-Pivot Blockers wear on their helmets?

  1. A Non-Pivot Blocker helmet cover
  2. A striped helmet cover
  3. A helmet cover with two stars on
  4. No helmet covers [Correct]

3.1.2 Where do Blockers line up if the Pivot is upright and on the Pivot Line?

  1. Behind the Jammers but in front of the Pivots
  2. In front Pivots
  3. Anywhere in front of the Jammers
  4. Behind both the Jammers and the Pivots
  5. Behind the Pivots [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.1

3.1.3 What do Non-Pivot Blockers wear on their helmets?

  1. A Non-Pivot Blocker helmet cover
  2. A striped helmet cover
  3. A helmet cover with two stars on
  4. No helmet covers [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.1

3.2.1 If a Pivot is not wearing the Pivot helmet cover ...

  1. they have all of the Pivot position rights and privileges.
  2. they have some of the Pivot position rights and privileges.
  3. they have none of the Pivot position rights and privileges. [Correct]

Note: If they're holding the Pivot helmet cover they can get the rights and privileges by putting it on.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2

3.2.1 True or False: It is mandatory to field a Pivot.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2

3.2.1 Which of these is correct:

  1. The Pivot is special subset of Blocker [Correct]
  2. The Blocker is special subset of Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2

3.2.1 If a skater is not wearing the Pivot helmet cover, isn't lined up in the Pivot starting position, but has the helmet cover in their hand ...

  1. They are a Blocker, able to become a Pivot [Correct]
  2. They are a Pivot
  3. They are a Blocker, unable to become a Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2

3.2.1 Where do Pivots generally line up?

  1. Behind the Blockers but in front of the Jammers
  2. Behind the Jammers but in front of the Blockers
  3. In front of the Jammers and the Blockers [Correct]
  4. Anywhere in front of the Jammers
  5. Behind both the Jammers and the Blockers

3.2.1.1 True or False: A Pivot may line up on the Pivot Line.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2.1

3.2.1.2 True or False: In certain circumstances a Pivot may take over the position of Jammer.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2.1

3.2.2 What is the minimum width of the stripe on the Pivot's helmet cover?

  1. 2.5 inches (6.3 cm)
  2. 1 inch (2.54 cm)
  3. 2 inches (5 cm) [Correct]
  4. 3 inches (7.5 cm)
  5. There is no limit
  6. 1.5 inches (3.81 cm)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2

3.2.2 What do Pivots wear on their helmets?

  1. No helmet covers
  2. A Non-Pivot Blocker helmet cover
  3. A striped helmet cover [Correct]
  4. A helmet cover with two stars on

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2

3.2.2.1 Who may have a helmet cover with a stripe on it which runs the length of the helmet?

  1. Only the Pivot [Correct]
  2. Any Blocker
  3. The Jammer or Pivot
  4. Any skater who is not the Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2.2

3.2.2.2 Where must the Pivot's helmet cover be before the start of a jam?

  1. On the skater's helmet only
  2. On the skater's helmet or in their hand [Correct]
  3. Anywhere on track
  4. In the hand of a member of the team
  5. In the skater's hand, or the hand of the team's Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2.2

3.2.2.2 True or False: A Pivot helmet cover may enter a jam in progress if the team does not have an active Pivot.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2.2

3.2.2.3 If a skater lines up in the Pivot starting position, under what situation will they be considered a Pivot?

  1. Any, as long as they are in the right position on track.
  2. Only if the skater is wearing or holding the Pivot helmet cover. [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2.2

3.2.3 If the Pivot cover falls to the ground, who may recover it?

  1. Any skater
  2. Only the Pivot [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2

3.2.3.1 If the Pivot cover falls to the ground, how may it be picked up again?

  1. Only by skating counter-clockwise
  2. By skating in any direction [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.2.3

3.3.1 Where do Jammers line up prior to the start of a jam?

  1. On the Jammer line only
  2. Behind the Jammer line only
  3. On or behind the Jammer line [Correct]
  4. On or behind the Pivot line

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3

3.3.1 Where do Jammers line up?

  1. In front of the Blockers and the Pivots
  2. Behind the Blockers but in front of the Pivots
  3. Behind the Pivots but in front of the Blockers
  4. Anywhere in front of the Pivots
  5. Behind both the Blockers and the Pivots [Correct]

3.3.1 How many Jammers is a team permitted to field per jam?

  1. 1 [Correct]
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3

3.3.1.1 Which of these are Jammer's privileges?

  1. Earning Lead Jammer [Correct]
  2. Calling off the Jam at any time
  3. Passing their position to the team's Pivot [Correct]
  4. Passing their position to any Blocker on their team

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3.1

3.3.1.1.1 True or False: The only Jammer who can call off the jam is the Jammer designated Lead Jammer.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3.1

3.3.1.1.2 A Jammer has the privilege of passing their position to ...

  1. their team's Pivot [Correct]
  2. either team's Pivot
  3. their team's non-Pivot Blockers
  4. the Designated Alternate

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3.1

3.3.2 What do Jammers wear on their helmets?

  1. A helmet cover with two stars on [Correct]
  2. A striped helmet cover
  3. A Non-Pivot Blocker helmet cover
  4. No helmet covers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3

3.3.2 What is the minimum width of the stars (point to point) on the Jammer's helmet cover?

  1. 3 inches (7.5 cm)
  2. 2.5 inches (6.3 cm)
  3. 1 inch (2.54 cm)
  4. 2 inches (5 cm)
  5. There is no limit
  6. 1.5 inches (3.81 cm)
  7. 4 inches (10 cm) [Correct]
  8. 5 inches (13 cm)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3

3.3.2.1 Who may have a helmet cover with a star or stars?

  1. Only the Pivot
  2. Any Blocker
  3. The Jammer or Pivot
  4. Any skater who is not the Pivot
  5. Only the Jammer [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3.2

3.3.2.1 If a Jammer is not wearing a helmet cover, they are considered ...

  1. active but unable to score points or earn Lead Jammer Status
  2. not active yet able to score points, but not earn Lead Jammer Status
  3. active and able to score points, but not earn Lead Jammer Status
  4. not active and unable to score points or earn Lead Jammer Status [Correct]

3.3.2.2 Where must the Jammer's helmet cover be before the start of a jam?

  1. On the skater's helmet only
  2. On the skater's helmet or in their hand [Correct]
  3. Anywhere on track
  4. In the hand of a member of the team
  5. In the skater's hand, or the hand of the team's Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3.2

3.3.2.2 True or False: A Jammer helmet cover may not enter a jam in progress if the team does not have an active Jammer.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3.2

3.3.2.3 If a skater lines up in the Jammer starting position, under what situation will they be considered an Active Jammer?

  1. Only if the skater is wearing the Jammer helmet cover. [Correct]
  2. Any, as long as they are in the right position on track.
  3. If the skater is wearing or holding the Jammer helmet cover.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3.2

3.3.3 An inactive Jammer ...

  1. has the advantage of all of the Jammer abilities, and can score but not earn Lead Jammer status
  2. is a Blocker
  3. is a Pivot
  4. has the advantage of all of the Jammer abilities, but can not score or earn Lead Jammer status [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.3

3.4.1 Which of the following skaters can call off the jam?

  1. Lead Jammer [Correct]
  2. Not-Lead Jammer
  3. Both jammers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.1 The Lead Jammer is ...

  1. the first Jammer to pass the rearmost Blocker legally and in bounds, having already passed all other Blockers legally and in bounds
  2. the first Jammer to pass one Blocker legally and in bounds
  3. the first Jammer to pass the foremost in-play Blocker legally and in bounds, having already passed all other Blockers legally and in bounds [Correct]
  4. the first Jammer to pass two Blockers legally and in bounds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.1 The Lead Jammer is ...

  1. the first Jammer to pass one Blocker legally and in bounds
  2. the first Jammer to pass all Blockers legally and in bounds [Correct]
  3. the first Jammer to pass two Blockers legally and in bounds
  4. the first Jammer to pass the foremost Blocker legally and in bounds
  5. the first Jammer to pass the rearmost Blocker legally and in bounds

3.4.1.1 True or False: Lead Jammer status will be signaled immediately after it is earned

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.1.1 True or False: Lead Jammer status will not be signaled immediately after it is earned

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.1.1.1 True or False: A Jammer can be out of bounds when they become Lead Jammer (assuming no blockers have committed any illegal penalties)

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.1.1.1 A Jammer can be Lead Jammer only if ...

  1. They are out of bounds when they become Lead Jammer and stay in bounds at all times
  2. They are in bounds when they become Lead Jammer and stay in bounds at all times
  3. They are in bounds when they become Lead Jammer but may be hit out out of bounds after [Correct]
  4. They are in bounds when they become Lead Jammer and stay out of bounds after

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.1.1.1 True or False: A Jammer may become Lead Jammer even if some part of their body or equipment is touching out of bounds

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True
  3. True, but only if the part of the body is not a legal target zone
  4. True, but only if the part of the body is not a legal blocking zone

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.1.2 Which part of the Jammer must be ahead of the foremost in-play blocker for them to become Lead Jammer?

  1. Head
  2. Wrist
  3. Hips [Correct]
  4. Feet
  5. Front wheels
  6. Rear wheels
  7. Fingers
  8. Face
  9. Knees

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.1.3 Which Blockers does a Jammer not need to pass in order to become Lead Jammer?

  1. Blockers ahead of the legal Engagement Zone [Correct]
  2. Blockers in the legal Engagement Zone
  3. Any blockers if there is a no pack situation

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.1.4 If there is a no pack situation, at what point does a Jammer become Lead Jammer?

  1. As soon as the no pack situation starts
  2. As soon as the pack has reformed
  3. As soon as the Jammer has passed one Blocker
  4. As soon as the Jammer has passed all Blockers [Correct]
  5. The Jammer can not become Lead Jammer during a no pack situation

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.1

3.4.2 Who must a Jammer pass to gain Lead Jammer status?

  1. The foremost in-play Blocker, having already passed all other Blockers. [Correct]
  2. The foremost in-play opposing Blocker, having already passed all other opposing Blockers.
  3. All Blockers, regardless of whether they are in-play or not.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.2.1 If a Jammer passes three opposing Blockers legally, and one opposing Blocker illegally ...

  1. they can not be Lead Jammer
  2. they can only be Lead Jammer if they re-pass all Blockers
  3. they can only be Lead Jammer if they re-pass the Blocker they did not legally pass [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.2.1 If a Jammer passes all Blockers illegally and is still within the engagement zone...

  1. They can only be Lead Jammer if they re-pass one Blocker legally
  2. They can not be Lead Jammer whatever happens
  3. They can only be Lead Jammer if they re-pass all Blockers legally [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.2.2 If a Jammer is legally blocked out of bounds and is within 20 feet (6 meters) of the pack, can they become Lead Jammer?

  1. No
  2. Yes [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.2.2 If a Jammer is legally blocked out of bounds on their approach to the pack, and have yet to be within 20 feet (6 meters) of the rear of the pack, can they become Lead Jammer?

  1. No [Correct]
  2. Yes

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.2.2 True or False: As a Jammer you can cause the opposing Jammer to be ineligible for Lead Jammer status by blocking them out of bounds before they are within 20 feet of the pack.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

3.4.2.2 True or False: As a Jammer you can cause the opposing Jammer to be ineligible for Lead Jammer status by blocking them out of bounds before they are within 20 feet (6 meters) of the pack.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.2.2 If a Jammer is legally blocked out of bounds and is within 20 feet of the pack, can they become Lead Jammer?

  1. No
  2. Yes [Correct]

3.4.2.2 If a Jammer is legally blocked out of bounds on their approach to the pack, and have yet to be within 20 feet of the rear of the pack, can they become Lead Jammer?

  1. No [Correct]
  2. Yes

3.4.2.3 If a Jammer has not passed all players on both teams legally and in bounds, and has cleared the pack by more than 20 feet, what are they declared?

  1. Lead Jammer (Only if they are ahead of the opposing Jammer)
  2. Lead Jammer
  3. Not Lead Jammer [Correct]

3.4.2.3 How far can a Jammer go from the pack before they are no longer eligible to re-pass a Blocker they have illegally passed, to be able to get Lead Jammer status?

  1. 15 feet
  2. 10 feet
  3. 5 feet
  4. One lap
  5. They are never allowed to re-pass a Blocker
  6. 20 feet [Correct]
  7. 25 feet
  8. 30 feet
  9. One corner

3.4.2.3 If a Jammer has not passed all players on both teams legally and in bounds, and has cleared the pack by more than 20 feet (6 meters), what are they declared?

  1. Lead Jammer (Only if they are ahead of the opposing Jammer)
  2. Lead Jammer
  3. Not Lead Jammer [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.2.3 How far can a Jammer go from the pack before they are no longer eligible to re-pass a Blocker they have illegally passed, to be able to get Lead Jammer status?

  1. 30 feet (9 meters)
  2. 15 feet (5 meters)
  3. 25 feet (8 meters)
  4. 10 feet (3 meters)
  5. 5 feet (1.5 meters)
  6. One lap
  7. They are never allowed to re-pass a Blocker
  8. 20 feet (6 meters) [Correct]
  9. One corner

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.2.4 If both Jammers simultaneously meet all requirements for Lead Jammer, who becomes Lead Jammer?

  1. Both Jammers
  2. Neither jammer
  3. The rearmost Jammer
  4. The foremost Jammer [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4.2

3.4.3 What determines a pass?

  1. The skater's hips [Correct]
  2. The skater's foremost body part
  3. The front wheels of a player's skates
  4. The rear wheels of a player's skates
  5. The skater's helmet
  6. The skater's nose
  7. The skater's knees
  8. The skater's foremost equipment part
  9. The skater's foremost equipment or body part
  10. The skater's momentum

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.4 If both Jammers fail to earn Lead Jammer statuses on their initial pass through the pack, what happens?

  1. The first Jammer out the pack gets Lead Jammer Status
  2. Lead Jammer status will be determined by the second pass through the pack by the Jammers
  3. There will be no Lead Jammer for that jam [Correct]
  4. Both Jammers become lead Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.4 True or False: If the first Jammer to emerge from the pack does not earn Lead Jammer status on their initial pass through the pack, the second Jammer to emerge from the pack is automatically Lead Jammer.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.4 True or False: If the first Jammer to emerge from the pack does not earn Lead Jammer status on their initial pass through the pack, the second Jammer to emerge from the pack is eligible to become Lead Jammer.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.5 True or False: A Jammer who begins the jam in the penalty box is eligible to earn Lead Jammer status.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.5 A Jammer who is sent to penalty box whilst making their initial pass through the pack is eligible to earn Lead Jammer status when they return to the track.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.6 If there is no Lead Jammer the jam will...

  1. continue for the full two minutes [Correct]
  2. continue for the full minute
  3. be called off by the referees as soon as both Jammers are out of the pack
  4. never end
  5. continue until one Jammer becomes Lead Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.6 The Jam ends when ...

  1. the referee whistles the end of the jam [Correct]
  2. the Lead Jammer repeatedly places both hands on their hips
  3. the Jam clock reaches 0:00

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.6 True or False: A Jammer can call off the jam if they were the Lead Jammer and an opponent's action removes their helmet cover (assume when they attempted to call off the jam they did not have the helmet cover on).

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.6 To call off a jam the Lead Jammer ...

  1. Repeatedly places both hands on their helmet until the referee whistles the end of the jam
  2. Shouts loudly that they are calling off the jam
  3. Places both hands on their hips firmly and keeps them there until the referee whistles the end of the jam
  4. Repeatedly places both hands on their hips until the referee whistles the end of the jam [Correct]
  5. Removes their helmet cover

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.6 True or False: A Jammer can call off the jam if they have been removed due to a penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.6 Who can legally call off a jam?

  1. Any skater
  2. Either jammer
  3. Lead Jammer [Correct]
  4. Not Lead Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.6 The ability to call off a jam is ...

  1. A privilege [Correct]
  2. A right

3.4.7 Once a Jammer has been declared Lead Jammer, how can they lose that status?

  1. By removing their helmet cover for any reason. [Correct]
  2. By an opposing player removing the Jammer's helmet cover.
  3. By being removed from play due to a penalty. [Correct]
  4. By a teammate removing the Jammer's helmet cover.

3.4.7 A Jammer forfeits Lead Jammer status by ...

  1. Skating backwards
  2. Being removed from play due to a penalty [Correct]
  3. Skating out of bounds
  4. Having their helmet cover removed by a skater on the opposing team
  5. Having their helmet cover removed by a skater on their own team [Correct]
  6. Removing their own helmet cover for any reason [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.4

3.4.7 A Jammer forfeits Lead Jammer status by ...

  1. Removing their own helmet cover for any reason [Correct]
  2. Having their helmet cover removed by a skater on their own team
  3. Having their helmet cover removed by a skater on the opposing team
  4. Being removed from play due to a penalty [Correct]
  5. Being given a minor penalty
  6. Skating backwards
  7. Skating out of bounds

3.5 Passing the Star can be done ...

  1. Only between the Pivot and Jammer start lines
  2. Only inside of the Engagement Zone [Correct]
  3. Only outside of the Engagement Zone
  4. Anywhere on track
  5. Only outside of the Pack
  6. Only inside of the Pack

3.5 True or False: A Pivot can become Lead Jammer if Passing the Star has occured

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Note: A Q and A from the WFTDA on February 13, 2013 clarifies that a "Pivot-turned-Jammer cannot gain Lead Jammer status"

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5 True or False; A Blocker can take on the position of Pivot if the Pivot helmet cover is passed to them and they put it on their helmet.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

3.5 If the Lead Jammer passes the star ...

  1. The new Jammer is now Lead Jammer
  2. The new Jammer can become Lead Jammer
  3. The opposing Jammer becomes Lead Jammer
  4. There will not be a Lead Jammer for this jam [Correct]
  5. The opposing Jammer can become Lead Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5 When passing the star, if the Jammer has Lead Jammer status, what status does the Pivot have after they become Jammer?

  1. Lead Jammer
  2. Not Lead jammer [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5 When passing the star, what is transferred?

  1. Lead Jammer status
  2. The position of Jammer and Lead Jammer status
  3. The position of Jammer [Correct]
  4. Nothing
  5. The position of Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5 A Jammer can transfer their position to who ...

  1. Their team's Pivot [Correct]
  2. Any Blocker on their team
  3. Any Blocker on their team except their pivot
  4. Either their own Pivot or the Pivot on the opposing team

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.1 Passing the Star can be done ...

  1. Only between the Pivot and Jammer start lines
  2. Only inside of the Engagement Zone [Correct]
  3. Only outside of the Engagement Zone
  4. Anywhere on track
  5. Only outside of the Pack
  6. Only inside of the Pack

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.1 Who must be within the Engagement Zone for a star to be transferred?

  1. All members of the team
  2. Both the Jammer and the Pivot [Correct]
  3. Only the Jammer
  4. Only the Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.2 True or False: A star can be transferred to a Pivot, even if they are out of play

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.3 Who is responsible for the legality of the star pass?

  1. The initiator of the star pass [Correct]
  2. The receiver of the star pass
  3. Whoever is holding the helmet cover
  4. The skater at the front
  5. The skater at the rear

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.3.1 True or False: Jammers may not transfer the star while on route to, or while in, the penalty box.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.3

3.5.3.2 True or False: A Jammer can transfer the star if they are returning from the penalty box and have not yet returned to play.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.3

3.5.4 Which of these is the correct procedure for a star pass?

  1. Jammer removes their helmet cover, any player hands the helmet cover to Pivot
  2. Any player removes the Jammer's helmet cover and hands the helmet cover to Pivot
  3. Pivot removes the Jammer's helmet cover
  4. Jammer removes their helmet cover, Jammer hands the helmet cover to Pivot [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.4 When a Jammer removes their helmet cover they lose:

  1. Pivot status
  2. Their ability to accrue points [Correct]
  3. Lead Jammer status [Correct]
  4. Nothing
  5. The ability to block
  6. Track position

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.5 Jammer status is transferred during a star pass when ...

  1. as soon as the star pass begins
  2. the Jammer has removed their helmet cover
  3. the Pivot is holding the helmet cover
  4. the Pivot is wearing the helmet cover on their helmet, regardless of the visibility of the stars
  5. the Pivot is wearing the helmet cover on their helmet and the stars are visible [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.5 Jammer status is transferred during a star pass when ...

  1. the Pivot is wearing the helmet cover on their helmet [Correct]
  2. the Pivot is holding the helmet cover
  3. the Jammer has removed their helmet cover
  4. as soon as the star pass begins

3.5.5.1 If a star pass has been completed, but was not legal, and the Pivot is now wearing the Jammer helmet cover, who is Jammer?

  1. The original Jammer, who is now not wearing the Jammer helmet cover [Correct]
  2. The Pivot who is now wearing the Jammer helmet cover
  3. The team has no Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.5

3.5.6 True or False: Once a star pass has been completed, the new Jammer can star pass back to the original Jammer

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.7 A star pass ...

  1. may not be blocked by a member of the other team
  2. may be blocked by the opposing team by any means
  3. may be blocked by the opposing team by any means of legal blocking [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5

3.5.8.1 If a helmet cover falls to the ground during a star pass, who can pick it up?

  1. only the Jammer
  2. only the Jammer or Pivot [Correct]
  3. any skater on the team
  4. only the Captain or Designated Alternative
  5. only a ref
  6. any member of the opposing team
  7. only the Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.8

3.5.8.1.1 During a star pass, a helmet cover falls to the ground then the Jammer is given a Major penalty for an unrelated incident. The Pivot then picks up the helmet cover and ...

  1. the Pivot gains Jammer status
  2. the Pivot gains Jammer status only when the original Jammer returns to the track [Correct]
  3. the Pivot gets a major penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.8

3.5.8.1.1 During a star pass, if a helmet cover falls to the ground and the Pivot picks it up ...

  1. the Pivot can only get Jammer status if they hand the helmet cover back to the Jammer and try the star pass again
  2. the Pivot gets a major penalty
  3. the Pivot is now eligible to obtain Jammer status [Correct]
  4. the Pivot can not get Jammer status

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.8

3.5.8.1.1 During a star pass, if a helmet cover falls to the ground and the Pivot picks it up ...

  1. the Pivot is now eligible to obtain Jammer status [Correct]
  2. the Pivot gets a minor penalty
  3. the Pivot gets a major penalty
  4. the Pivot can only get Jammer status is they hand the helmet cover back to the Jammer and try the star pass again
  5. the Pivot can not get Jammer status

3.5.8.1.1 During a star pass, if a helmet cover falls to the ground and the Pivot picks it up ...

  1. the Pivot is now eligible to obtain Jammer status [Correct]
  2. the Pivot gets a major penalty
  3. the Pivot can only get Jammer status is they hand the helmet cover back to the Jammer and try the star pass again
  4. the Pivot can not get Jammer status

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.8

3.5.8.2 If a helmet cover is dropped during a star pass ...

  1. it can only be recovered in the normal course of clockwise skating
  2. it can only be recovered in the normal course of forwards, counter-clockwise skating [Correct]
  3. it can be recovered by skating clockwise if inside of the Engagement Zone
  4. it can be recovered by skating clockwise if outside of the Engagement Zone

3.5.8.2 If a helmet cover is dropped during a star pass ...

  1. it can only be recovered in the normal course of clockwise skating
  2. it can only be recovered in the normal course of counter-clockwise skating
  3. it can be recovered by skating in any direction and skating out of bounds [Correct]
  4. it can be recovered by skating in any direction, but not skating out of bounds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.8

3.5.8.2 If a Jammer helmet cover is dropped out of bounds during a star pass ...

  1. the team will skate without a Jammer for the rest of the jam
  2. a ref must pick up the helmet cover and hand it to the Jammer or Pivot
  3. the Pivot or Jammer may skate out of bounds to retrieve it [Correct]
  4. only the Pivot may skate out of bounds to retrieve it

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.8

3.5.8.3 If a star pass is attempted and fails, and the Jammer returns the helmet cover to their helmet they ...

  1. are given a major penalty
  2. regain active Jammer status, as well as Lead Jammer status if previously obtained
  3. regain active Jammer status, but not Lead Jammer status if previously obtained [Correct]
  4. are not a Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.8

3.5.8.3 If a star pass is attempted and fails, and the Jammer returns the helmet cover to their helmet they ...

  1. are given a minor penalty
  2. are given a major penalty
  3. regain active Jammer status, as well as Lead Jammer status if previously obtained
  4. regain active Jammer status, but not Lead Jammer status if previously obtained [Correct]
  5. are not a Jammer

3.5.9.1 True or False: If a Pivot has been passed the star but not yet put it on their helmet, they can be subject to out of play penalties

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.9

3.5.9.2 A Pivot who is passed the star ...

  1. does not pick up where the previous Jammer left off on points scored or number of laps through the pack
  2. picks up where the previous Jammer left off on number of laps through the pack but not points scored
  3. picks up where the previous Jammer left off on points scored but not number of laps through the pack
  4. picks up where the previous Jammer left off on points scored and number of laps through the pack [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.9

3.5.9.2 If the star is passed to a Pivot, but the Pivot accidentally put the helmet cover on in such a way that the stars are not visible, can they score points?

  1. Yes
  2. No [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.9

3.5.9.3 How long does a Pivot who has taken the position of Jammer after a successful star pass have to play in that position?

  1. For ever more
  2. The rest of the period
  3. The rest of the game
  4. The rest of the jam [Correct]
  5. At least one lap
  6. At least three laps
  7. As long or short a time as they want

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.9

3.5.9.4 How long does a Jammer who has taken the position of Blocker after a successful star pass have to play in that position?

  1. The rest of the period
  2. The rest of the jam [Correct]
  3. The rest of the game
  4. At least one lap
  5. As long or short a time as they want
  6. For ever more
  7. At least three laps

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.5.9

3.5.10.1 If a Jammer, formerly a Pivot who received a star pass, is sent to the penalty box and is in there when the jam ends ...

  1. The team cannot field a different player as a Jammer [Correct]
  2. The team cannot field a different player as either a Jammer or Pivot
  3. The team cannot field a different player as a Pivot
  4. Another player is permitted to play as a Pivot [Correct]

3.5.10.1 If a Jammer, formerly a Pivot who received a star pass, is sent to the penalty box and is in there when the jam ends ...

  1. They will be a blocker in the next jam
  2. They will be their team's pivot in the next jam
  3. They will be their team's jammer in the next jam [Correct]
  4. They can choose to be either the pivot or Jammer in the next jam

3.5.10.1 If a Jammer, formerly a Pivot who received a star pass, is sent to the penalty box and is in there when the jam ends ...

  1. They will be their team's jammer in the next jam [Correct]
  2. They can choose to be either the pivot or Jammer in the next jam
  3. They will be their team's pivot in the next jam
  4. They will be a blocker in the next jam

3.5.10.2 If a Blocker, formerly a Jammer who completed a star pass, is sent to the penalty box and is in there when the jam ends ...

  1. they will be their team's pivot in the next jam
  2. they will be their team's Jammer in the next jam
  3. they can choose to be either a Blocker or a Jammer in the next jam
  4. they will be a blocker in the next jam [Correct]

3.5.10.2 If a Blocker, formerly a Jammer who completed a star pass, is sent to the penalty box and is in there when the jam ends ...

  1. different players are permitted to play Jammer and Pivot in the next jam. [Correct]
  2. the team can not field a different player as either a Jammer or a Pivot
  3. different players are permitted to play Jammer but not Pivot in the next jam.
  4. different players are permitted to play Pivot but not Jammer in the next jam.

3.6 True or False: Helmet cover colors don't need to have a particularly high contrast with each other.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

3.6.1 The Jammer and/or Pivot's helmet cover colors are of high contrast if ...

  1. there is a large degree of visual difference between the star/stripe color and the base color of the cover such that the star/stripe color stands out from the base color [Correct]
  2. there is a small degree of visual difference between the star/stripe color and the base color of the cover such that the star/stripe color blends in to the base color
  3. there is some degree of visual difference between the star/stripe color and the base color of the cover such that the star/stripe color is provably different to the color
  4. there is a complimentary visual difference between the star/stripe color and the base color of the cover such that the star/stripe color does not clash with the base color

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.6

3.6.1 What happens if a team's helmet cover colors do not meet the definition of high contrast beyond a reasonable doubt?

  1. They are allowed to play
  2. The Head Referee shall request that the team use helmet covers that meet the definition [Correct]
  3. No helmet covers are used
  4. The teams swap helmet covers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.6

3.6.1 True or False: Helmet cover colors don't need to have a particularly high contrast with each other.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.6

3.6.2 A team's helmet covers are easily identifiable if they can be readily distinguished by who?

  1. Officials, other players, and fans [Correct]
  2. Only officials
  3. Only officials and other players
  4. Only other players and fans
  5. Only officials and fans
  6. The team and the fans
  7. Nobody
  8. Everybody

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.6

3.6.2 True or False: Blockers' helmets may not be of the same color as the base color of a team's helmet covers.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

3.6.3 True or False: As long as they are all of high contrast beyond a reasonable doubt, a team can use multiple colour schemes for their helmet covers.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.6

3.6.4 A helmet cover with a single, solid stripe at least two inches wide running from front to back is worn by

  1. The Jammer
  2. The Pivot [Correct]
  3. Blockers
  4. Refs

3.6.4 A Pivot's helmet cover ...

  1. must have a least one, but possibly several, solid stripes a minimum of two inches wide running from side to side
  2. must have a single, solid stripe a minimum of two inches wide running from side to side
  3. must have a single, solid stripe at a maximum of two inches wide running from front to back
  4. must have at least one, but possibly several, solid stripes a minimum of two inches wide running from front to back
  5. must have a single, solid stripe a minimum of two inches wide running from front to back [Correct]
  6. must have a single, solid stripe a minimum of one inch wide running from front to back

3.6.4.1 True or False: As long as the stripes don't run from front to back, any skater can have stripes on their helmet which run the length of it.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

3.6.5 How large must the stars on the Jammer helmet cover be?

  1. a minimum of four inches across [Correct]
  2. a maximum of four inches across
  3. a minimum of three inches across
  4. a minimum of five inches across
  5. a maximum of five inches across
  6. a maximum of three inches across

3.6.5.1 True or False: Only the Jammer's helmet cover may have stars on it or any marks that might be confused with stars.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

3.6.6 Before a jam starts, helmet covers must

  1. be on the player’s helmet and nowhere else
  2. be on the player’s helmet or in the player’s hand [Correct]
  3. be in the player’s hand and nowhere else

3.6.6 Helmet covers ...

  1. can enter a jam in progress
  2. can not enter a jam in progress [Correct]

3.7.1 Each member of a respective team participating in a bout must ...

  1. wear a uniform, though not necessarily the same one as their fellow skaters
  2. wear a uniform which clearly identifies them as a member of their team [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7

3.7.1.1 True or False: Tape can be used to fasten numbers on uniforms.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.1

3.7.1.1 True or False: Safety pins should be used to secure patches or numbers on uniforms

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.1

3.7.2 True or False: A visible "A" on the arm is mandatory for team Captain's Designated Alternate

  1. True, it's mandatory [Correct]
  2. False, it's optional

3.7.2 True or False: A visible "C" on the arm or uniform is optional for team Captains

  1. False, it's mandatory [Correct]
  2. True, it's optional

3.7.2 True or False: A visible "C" on the arm is optional for team Captains

  1. False, it's mandatory [Correct]
  2. True, it's optional

3.7.2 True or False: A visible "A" on the arm or uniform is mandatory for team Captain's Designated Alternate

  1. True, it's mandatory [Correct]
  2. False, it's optional

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7

3.7.3 Player names, with regard to uniforms ...

  1. are optional [Correct]
  2. must be clearly written on the back of the uniform
  3. must be clearly written on the back of the uniform and the helmet
  4. must be clearly written on a small label inside the uniform

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7

3.7.4 Skater numbers must be

  1. unique across both teams and refs
  2. unique with relation to the skater's own team [Correct]
  3. visibly displayed [Correct]
  4. unique, but it's optional for them to be clearly visible
  5. made of only numbers
  6. made of both numbers and letters

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7

3.7.4.1 Numbers on the back of uniforms must be ...

  1. able to be read by skaters who are at least 10 feet (3 meters) behind
  2. able to be read by officials who are positioned anywhere within the track or on its boundary [Correct]
  3. able to be read by officials who are positioned within 20 feet (6 meters) of the pack

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.1 Numbers on the back of uniforms must be ...

  1. At least 6 inches (15 cm) tall
  2. At least 5 inches (13 cm) tall
  3. At least 4 inches (10 cm) tall [Correct]
  4. No larger than 4 inches (10 cm) tall
  5. At least 8 inches (20 cm) tall
  6. At least 12 inches (30 cm) tall
  7. No larger than 12 inches (30 cm) tall

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.1 Numbers on the back of uniforms must be ...

  1. able to be read by officials who are positioned within 20 feet of the pack
  2. able to be read by skaters who are at least 10 feet behind
  3. able to be read by officials who are positioned anywhere within the track or on its boundary [Correct]

3.7.4.2 A font, with regard to the number on the back of uniforms, is said to be readable if ...

  1. it can be easily read and distinguished from the other players' numbers by other players
  2. it is one of a set list of readable fonts
  3. it can be easily read and distinguished from the other players' numbers by the officials, other players, and fans. [Correct]
  4. it can be read easily at a distance of 20 feet (6 meters)
  5. if you stand two players on the same team next to each other, you can see there is a difference

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.2 A font, with regard to the number on the back of uniforms, is said to be readable if ...

  1. it can be easily read and distinguished from the other players’ numbers by other players
  2. it can be easily read and distinguished from the other players’ numbers by the officials, other players, and fans. [Correct]
  3. it is one of a set list of readable fonts
  4. it can be read easily at a distance of 20 feet
  5. if you stand two players on the same team next to each other, you can see there is a difference

3.7.4.3 How many characters can a player's number have?

  1. Exactly 4
  2. Up to 4 [Correct]
  3. Exactly 2
  4. Exactly 3
  5. Exactly 6
  6. Up to 3
  7. Up to 2
  8. Up to 5

3.7.4.4 True or False: A player's number must have at least one numerical digit.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.4 Which of these player numbers is valid?

  1. M14 [Correct]
  2. 1337 [Correct]
  3. CAT
  4. LV
  5. "5"
  6. 100%
  7. 404 [Correct]
  8. F2345
  9. 0000 [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.4 True or False: A player's number must have at least one letter.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.5 A player has "88mph" written on their uniform where mph is not part of their number. How large can the letters "mph" be?

  1. up to 2 inches (5 cm) [Correct]
  2. up to 1 inch (2.54 cm)
  3. up to 3 inches (7.5 cm)
  4. up to 4 inches (10 cm)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.5 If a skater has small characters preceding or following their number on their uniform, are these small characters part of the skater's number?

  1. Nope [Correct]
  2. Yup

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.6 True or False: L5 and J5 are considered different numbers and so can be worn by different skaters on the same team.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.6 True or False: Skaters on the same team can not share the same number

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.6 True or False: L5 and L6 are considered different numbers and so can be worn by different skaters on the same team.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.7 A team's jersey numbers must ...

  1. meet the definition of high contrast beyond a reasonable doubt [Correct]
  2. be visible, but meeting the definition of high contrast beyond a reasonable doubt is optional

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.4.8 A team's jersey numbers are of high contrast if:

  1. there is a slight degree of visual difference between the color of the number and the base color of the jersey such that the number stands out from the base color of the jersey if you look really close
  2. there is a noticable degree of visual difference between the color of the number and the base color of the jersey such that the number slightly stands out from the base color of the jersey
  3. there is a large degree of visual difference between the color of the number and the base color of the jersey such that the number significantly stands out from the base color of the jersey [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.4

3.7.5 True or False: Handwritten numbers on the arm are acceptable.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7

3.7.5 Where must each skater visibly display their number?

  1. Wrist
  2. Hip or thigh
  3. Sleeve or arm [Correct]
  4. Face
  5. Helmet
  6. Front of their uniform

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7

3.7.5 Numbers on the arm/sleeve must be:

  1. Between two inches (5 cm) and five inches (13 cm) tall
  2. Between one inch (2.54 cm) and three inches (7.5 cm) tall
  3. Between two inches (5 cm) and four (10 cm) inches tall [Correct]
  4. Between one inch (2.54 cm) and four inches (10 cm) tall
  5. Between three inches (7.5 cm) and four inches (10 cm) tall
  6. Between one inch (2.54 cm) and two inches (5 cm) tall
  7. Between three inches (7.5 cm) and five inches (13 cm) tall

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7

3.7.5.2 True or False: Numbers on the helmet must match roster numbers.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.5

3.7.5.2 True or False: Numbers may not be placed on the helmet in addition to the arm/sleeve.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.5

3.7.5.2 True or False: Numbers may be placed on the helmet in addition to the arm/sleeve.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

3.7.5.3 Numbers on the arm/sleeve must be at least ...

  1. two inches (5 cm) tall [Correct]
  2. three inches (7.5 cm) tall
  3. one inch (2.54 cm) tall

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.5

3.7.5.4 Numbers on the arm/sleeve can be at most...

  1. three inches (7.5 cm) tall
  2. four inches (10 cm) tall [Correct]
  3. one inch (2.54 cm) tall
  4. two inches (5 cm) tall

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.7.5

3.8.1 Which of these is a valid reason to prevent jewellery being worn during the bout:

  1. It is not from one of the merch tables
  2. It clashes with the uniform
  3. It might cause danger to other players [Correct]
  4. It might interfere with play [Correct]
  5. It's deemed a safety hazard by the referees [Correct]
  6. Referees deem the jewellery to be in poor taste

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.8

3.8.1 True or False: Jewelry may be worn during the bout.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.8

3.9.1 What types of skates can players wear?

  1. Quad roller skates only [Correct]
  2. Quad roller skates or inline skates only
  3. Inline skates only
  4. Any kind of skate deemed safe by the referees
  5. Any skate with a toe-stop

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/3.9

4.1 True or False: Nobody really knows the definition of "The Pack". Anybody who says they do is lying.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1

4.1.1 True or False: Blockers who are not skating and are standing, within 10 feet (3 meters) of a pack skater, are part of the pack.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1

4.1.1 The pack is defined by

  1. the largest group of in bounds Blockers, skating in proximity, containing members from both teams. [Correct]
  2. the largest group of in bounds Blockers containing members from both teams.
  3. the largest group of in bounds Blockers skating in proximity.
  4. the largest group of Blockers.
  5. the largest group of Blockers, skating in proximity, containing members from both teams.
  6. the largest group of Blockers skating in proximity.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1

4.1.1.1 The pack is comprised of:

  1. Only Blockers [Correct]
  2. Blockers and Jammers
  3. Only Jammers
  4. Blockers and at least one Pack Ref

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1.1

4.1.1.2 You are in the pack if your proximity to the nearest pack skater is no more than ...

  1. 20 feet (6 meters)
  2. 5 feet (1.5 meters)
  3. 10 feet (3 meters) [Correct]
  4. 15 feet (4.6 meters)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1.1

4.1.1.2 Proximity to the pack is measured from where

  1. hips [Correct]
  2. fingers
  3. the fore-most part of the skater
  4. the rear-most part of the skater
  5. wheels

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1.1

4.1.1.2 You are in the pack if your proximity to the nearest pack skater is no more than ...

  1. 5 feet
  2. 10 feet [Correct]
  3. 15 feet
  4. 20 feet

4.1.1.3 True or False: If one team has no blockers on track, a Pack can still be formed

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1.1

4.1.1.3 True or False: A Pack can form if one team only has one Blocker on the track

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1.1

4.1.2 What happens if there are two groups of blockers, equal in number, more than 10 feet (3 meters) away from each other on the track and neither meets the pack definition?

  1. There is a No Pack [Correct]
  2. The group at the front is declared The Pack
  3. Both groups become The Pack
  4. The group at the back is declared The Pack

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1

4.1.2 True or False: A skater or group of skaters is always responsible for the consequences of their actions.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1

4.1.2 True or False: If you intentionally create a no pack situation you may be given a penalty?

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1

4.1.2 What happens if there are two groups of blockers, equal in number, more than ten feet away from each other on the track and neither meets the pack definition?

  1. There is a No Pack [Correct]
  2. The group at the front is declared The Pack
  3. Both groups become The Pack
  4. The group at the back is declared The Pack

4.1.2 Who is responsible for maintaining a legally defined pack?

  1. The winning team's Pivot
  2. Both teams [Correct]
  3. The team with the fewest fouls
  4. The team who have the most skaters at the front
  5. The team who have the most skaters at the rear
  6. Both Pivots
  7. The foremost Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1

4.1.2.1 The distance between the Pack and the Engagement Zone is measured as:

  1. the shortest distance between skaters' hips [Correct]
  2. the longest distance between skaters' hips
  3. the longest distance between skaters' fingers
  4. the longest distance between skaters' wheels
  5. the shortest distance between skaters' fingers
  6. the shortest distance between skaters' wheels

4.1.2.1 The distance used when determining the Pack and the Engagement Zone is measured as:

  1. the shortest distance between skaters' hips
  2. the longest distance between skaters' fingers
  3. the longest distance parallel to the track boundary between skaters' hips
  4. the shortest distance parallel to the track boundary between skaters' hips [Correct]
  5. the shortest distance between skaters' fingers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.1.2

4.2.1 How far behind the Pivot line is the Jammer line?

  1. Exactly 30 feet [Correct]
  2. Exactly 20 feet
  3. Exactly 25 feet
  4. Roughly 30 feet
  5. Roughly 20 feet
  6. Roughly 25 feet
  7. An unspecified distance
  8. Between 20 and 30 feet

4.2.1 Prior to the start of a Jam, where should all Blockers be?

  1. In front of the Pivots
  2. In front of the Jammers [Correct]
  3. On track
  4. Behind the Jammers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.1 How far behind the Pivot line is the Jammer line?

  1. Between 20 feet (6 meters) and 30 feet (9 meters)
  2. Exactly 30 feet (9 meters) [Correct]
  3. Exactly 20 feet (6 meters)
  4. Exactly 25 feet (8 meters)
  5. Roughly 30 feet (9 meters)
  6. Roughly 20 feet (6 meters)
  7. Roughly 25 feet (8 meters)
  8. An unspecified distance

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.1 Prior to the start of a Jam, where should all Blockers be?

  1. In front of the Pivots
  2. In front of the Jammers [Correct]
  3. On track
  4. Behind the Jammers

Note: Sometimes blockers line up behind the Jam line (but on the track) to intentionally get a penalty. Even though it's a common tactic it is against the rules, hence the gaining of the minor penalty.

4.2.1 The Pivot line is:

  1. a straight line across the track at the head of the straightaway [Correct]
  2. a curved line across the track at the head of the straightaway
  3. a diagonal line across the track at the head of the straightaway
  4. a straight line across the track at any point along the straightaway
  5. a diagonal line across the track at any point along the straightaway

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.1.1 Pre-jam, Blockers must be in position so that ...

  1. No pack exists at the start of the jam
  2. Either a pack exists behind the Pivot Line and in front of the Jammer Line, or can immediately form there [Correct]
  3. Either a pack exists in front of the Pivot Line and behind the Jammer Line, or can immediately form there

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2.1

4.2.1.1.1 If there are not enough Blockers from one team on-track and in correct pre-jam positioning at the start of a jam ...

  1. The Pivot receives a Major penalty [Correct]
  2. The Captain receives a Major penalty
  3. The Captain's Alternate receives a Major penalty
  4. Nobody receives a Major penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2.1

4.2.1.2 True or False: Blockers are permitted to be down on one knee, intentionally, at the jam-starting whistle.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2.1

4.2.1.2 Which of these positions may a blocker be in at the jam-starting whistle?

  1. Standing [Correct]
  2. Down on one knee [Correct]
  3. Laying on their back
  4. In a dog-pile
  5. Off the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2.1

4.2.1.2.1 True or False: Skaters may take jam-starting positions which delay the formation of a pack after the jam-start whistle.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2.1

4.2.2 True or False: Pivots can lay down and as long as some part of them is touching the Pivot Line and be considered "on the Pivot Line".

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.2 Who may line up on the Pivot line?

  1. Only Pivots [Correct]
  2. Blockers (as long as the Pivots are not on the Pivot line)
  3. Jammers
  4. Blockers (at any time)
  5. Anyone who is not a Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.3 True or False: Blockers must always line up behind the pivots' hips.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.3 When is a Non-Pivot Blocker able to line up in front of the Pivots (as demarked by the hips)?

  1. When the Pivot is on the Pivot line and upright
  2. When the Pivot is not on the Pivot line [Correct]
  3. Any time
  4. When the Pivot is on the Pivot line but not upright [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.3 When is a Non-Pivot Blocker able to line up in front of the Pivots (as demarked by the hips)?

  1. When the Pivot is on the Pivot line
  2. When the Pivot is not on the Pivot line [Correct]
  3. Any time
  4. Never

4.2.4 The Jammer Starting Position is ...

  1. on the Jammer Line
  2. on or behind the Jammer Line [Correct]
  3. anywhere behind the Blockers
  4. anywhere behind the Pivots
  5. only behind the Jammer Line

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.5 True or False: There are no rules which govern inside/outside positioning when it comes to Blockers lining up for a jam between the Pivot and Jammer line, assuming the Pivot is not on the Pivot line.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.2.5 True or False: There is a specific order that Blockers must line up in behind the Pivot before the jam-starting whistle.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.2

4.3 Skaters are in-play if they are within the engagement zone. How is this defined?

  1. From the back to the front of the pack
  2. From 10 feet (3 meters) behind the pack to 10 feet (3 meters) in front of the pack
  3. From 20 feet (6 meters) behind the pack to 20 feet (6 meters) in front of the pack [Correct]
  4. From the back of the pack to 20 feet (6 meters) in front
  5. From the back of the pack to 10 feet (3 meters) in front

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3

4.3 Skaters are in-play if they are within the engagement zone. How is this defined?

  1. From the back to the front of the pack
  2. From the back of the pack to 10 feet in front
  3. From 10 feet behind the pack to 10 feet in front of the pack
  4. From the back of the pack to 20 feet in front
  5. From 20 feet behind the pack to 20 feet in front of the pack [Correct]

4.3.1 To remain in the pack (once the pack is in motion) skaters may change location and skate ...

  1. within 10 feet of their team's jammer
  2. within 10 feet of the opposing team's jammer
  3. within "the pack" [Correct]
  4. within 5 feet of another skater
  5. within 20 feet of a pack skater

4.3.1 True or False: If a skater is within the pack and they change position, they are no longer within the pack

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3

4.3.2 When a Blocker is Out of Play, which of the following can they do?

  1. assist their Jammer
  2. skate back in to play [Correct]
  3. block any opposing players
  4. engage the opposing Jammer
  5. get penalties [Correct]
  6. assist their teammates

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3

4.3.2 When a skater is Out of Play, which of the following can they do?

  1. assist their Jammer
  2. skate back in to play [Correct]
  3. block any opposing players
  4. engage the opposing Jammer
  5. get penalties [Correct]
  6. assist their teammates

4.3.2 When is a Blocker Out of Play?

  1. When they are more than 15 feet outside the pack
  2. When they are more than 20 feet outside the pack [Correct]
  3. When they are more than 20 feet in front of, or anywhere (more than 0 feet) behind, the pack
  4. When they are more than 20 feet behind, or anywhere (more than 0 feet) in front of, the pack
  5. When they are more than 10 feet outside the pack
  6. When they are more than 5 feet outside the pack
  7. When they are in front of the Pivot

4.3.2 When is a Blocker Out of Play?

  1. When they are more than 10 feet (3 meters) from the pack
  2. When they are more than 20 feet (6 meters) outside the pack [Correct]
  3. When they are in front of the Pivot
  4. When they are more than 20 feet (6 meters) behind, or anywhere in front of, the pack
  5. When they are more than 20 feet (6 meters) in front of, or anywhere behind, the pack
  6. When they are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) from the pack
  7. When they are more than 15 feet (5 meters) outside the pack

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3

4.3.2.2 Who can an Out of Play Blocker assist?

  1. nobody [Correct]
  2. their Jammer
  3. other teammates
  4. their Pivot
  5. the other team's Jammer
  6. any In Play skater

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.2

4.3.2.2 True or False: When Out of Play, a skater can still give their Jammer a "whip"

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.2

4.3.2.3 True or False: A Blocker 16 feet (4.9 meters) from the front of the Pack can block and assist.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.2

4.3.2.3 True or False: A Blocker 21 feet (6.4 meters) from the front of the Pack can block and assist.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.2

4.3.2.3 True or False: A skater 16 feet from the front of the Pack can block and assist.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

4.3.2.3 True or False: A skater 21 feet from the front of the Pack can block and assist.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

4.3.2.4 True or False: Skaters may assist downed teammates within the Engagement Zone.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

4.3.2.5 Where can skaters assist a downed teammate?

  1. Anywhere on the track
  2. Only in The Pack
  3. Only in the Engagement Zone [Correct]

4.3.3 True or False: Blockers who are out of play must slow or speed up to re-enter the Engagement Zone.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3

4.3.3.1 If Out of Play, a skater must..

  1. yield the right of way to the opposing Jammer by stopping as soon as possible.
  2. yield the right of way to the opposing Jammer by slowing down.
  3. yield the right of way to the opposing Jammer by physically moving out of the Jammer's path. [Correct]
  4. yield the right of way to the opposing Jammer by speeding up.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.3.1 True or False: If an Out of Play skater passively blocks the opposing team's Jammer they may get a penalty.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.3.1 True or False: a referee must give a skater an Out of Play warning before giving them a penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.3.2 If a skater falls, they can wait for the pack to get so far ahead that they re-enter the Engagement Zone from the front.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.3.2 True or False: if a skater skates too far forwards, Out of Play, they may skate round the track and re-enter the Engagement Zone from the back.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.3.2.1 If a blocker sprints forwards leaving the Engagement Zone, then continues to sprint round the track, they will be In Play when they reach 20 feet (6 meters) of the rear of The Pack and not gain any penalties.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.3.2.1 If a blocker sprints forwards leaving the Engagement Zone, then continues to sprint round the track, they will be In Play when they reach 20 feet of the rear of The Pack and not gain any penalties.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

4.3.3.2.2 If a skater falls, they can "cut the track" to catch up to the Pack

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.3.2.3 As a blocker, re-entering the Engagement Zone by lapping the pack or allowing the pack to lap you results in...

  1. penalties [Correct]
  2. you being back in play

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.3

4.3.4 Who can a Jammer initiate engagement with outside of the Engagement Zone?

  1. Any skater
  2. The opposing Jammer [Correct]
  3. The opposing Jammer and Pivot
  4. Any skater on their own team

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3

4.3.4.1 If an Out of Play Blocker engages a Jammer outside of the Engagement Zone, the Jammer may ...

  1. counter-block in any way
  2. legally counter-block [Correct]
  3. counter-block then block normally
  4. not block or counter-block

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.4

4.3.4.2 True or False: Jammers may assist Out of Play Blockers

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.3.4

4.4.1 When may the pack start rolling?

  1. on a single short whistle blast from the Official [Correct]
  2. on a double whistle blast from the Official
  3. on the fourth of four short whistle blast from the Official

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.4

4.4.1 When does the pack start rolling?

  1. on a single whistle blast from the Official [Correct]
  2. on a double whistle blast from the Official
  3. on the fourth of four short whistle blast from the Official

4.4.2 Which of these can the Jammer not be doing when the jam-starting whistle is blown, assuming they are behind the Jammer Line?

  1. Coasting
  2. Moving at a constant speed
  3. Accelerating [Correct]
  4. Braking

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.4

4.4.2 True or False: Jammers can be accelerating when the jam-starting whistle is blown as long as they have not already crossed the Jammer Line.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/4.4

4.4.2 True or False: Jammers can be accelerating when the Jammer starting whistle is blown as long as they have not already crossed the Jammer start line.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

4.4.2 Which of these can the Jammer not be doing when the Jammer starting whistle is blown, assuming they are behind the Jammer line?

  1. Accelerating [Correct]
  2. Moving
  3. Coasting
  4. Braking

4.4.2 When does the Official whistle the Jammers to begin their sprint through the pack (assuming there is not a "no pack" situation)?

  1. Once the rearmost pack skater has crossed the Pivot line [Correct]
  2. Once the rearmost pack skater has crossed the Jammer line
  3. After three seconds
  4. After five seconds
  5. Immediately after the pack has begun rolling

5.1.1 Unintentional positional blocking is ...

  1. Always legal
  2. Possibly illegal [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.1 True or False: Blocking must always be deliberate.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.1 Which of these is not positional blocking?

  1. Contact Blocking [Correct]
  2. Passive Blocking
  3. Frontal Blocking
  4. Body Blocking

5.1.1 True or False: Blocking must always include contact.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.1 True or False: Blocking includes counter-blocking.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.1.1 True or False: Generally, counter-blocking is treated as different to blocking and not held to the same rules.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.1 Counter-blocking is ...

  1. any motion/movement towards an oncoming block by the receiving skater which is designed to counteract an opponent's block [Correct]
  2. any motion/movement away from an oncoming block by the receiving skater which is designed to get away from an opponent's block
  3. any block against an opposing skater
  4. any block deemed "counter productive"

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.2 Which blockers may skate in front of an opposing skater to impede their movement on the track?

  1. Only blockers in The Pack
  2. Any blocker, any time
  3. Only blockers in play [Correct]
  4. Any blocker on their own team
  5. Only Pivots

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.3 Who can execute a contact block?

  1. Players stepping in the counter-clockwise direction [Correct]
  2. Players skating in the counter-clockwise direction [Correct]
  3. Players stepping in the clockwise direction
  4. Players skating in the clockwise direction
  5. Players who are stationary

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.3 Who may execute a positional block?

  1. Players stepping in the counter-clockwise direction [Correct]
  2. Players skating in the counter-clockwise direction [Correct]
  3. Players stepping in the clockwise direction
  4. Players skating in the clockwise direction
  5. Players who are stationary

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.4 True or False: It is legal to block a skater who is standing completely still on the track.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.4 True or False: It is legal to block players who are standing on the track.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.5 True or false: It is legal to block players who are skating clockwise on the track.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.1.5 True or False: It is illegal to block players who are stepping clockwise on the track.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.1

5.1.2 True or False: The initiator of the block is not always responsible for the legality of their contact.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.2 The "initiator of the block" is ...

  1. the skater who is blocked by an opponent
  2. the skater who makes contact with a target zone of an opponent [Correct]
  3. the skater who moves to make contact with any other player

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.3 True or false: You may engage an opposing player before your starting whistle has blown.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

5.1.3 If a skater is in play and either stepping or skating counter-clockwise, they may:

  1. Block other skaters who are in play, even if they are stationary, or stepping or skating clockwise [Correct]
  2. Only block other skaters who are in play and either stepping or skating counter-clockwise

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.3.1 When can blockers and Jammers start blocking?

  1. Both on the first whistle
  2. Blockers on the first whistle, Jammers on the second [Correct]
  3. Jammers on the first whistle, Blockers on the second
  4. Both on the second whistle

5.1.3.1 When can Blockers and Jammers start blocking?

  1. Both on the jam-start whistle [Correct]
  2. Blockers on the jam-start whistle, Jammers when they reach the Engagement Zone

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.3

5.1.3.1 True or false: You may engage an opposing player before the jam-start whistle has blown in a way which forces your opponent out of their established position.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.3

5.1.3.2 True or False: Jammers can execute a block on the opposing Jammer after the First whistle.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

5.1.4 True or False: As long as you've practised, you can use dangerous blocking techniques.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1

5.1.4.1 True or False: Skaters are not permitted to block to the back

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.4

5.1.4.2 True or False: As long as they are not stationary, a skater can be moving both clockwise or counter-clockwise when executing a block.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.4

5.1.4.3 How many skates must be on the floor when a skater executes a block?

  1. Skates on the floor are optional
  2. At least one [Correct]
  3. Both

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.4

5.1.4.4 Which of these skaters can be blocked?

  1. A falling skater
  2. A skater on the floor having just fallen
  3. A skater getting up from the floor after a fall
  4. A skater standing and stationary after a fall [Correct]
  5. A skater having taken a knee

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.4

5.1.4.4 True or False: A skater with both hands touching the floor is considered down.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.4

5.1.4.4 True or False: Skaters on one knee are always considered down.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.4

5.1.4.4 True or False: Skaters standing still are always considered down.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.1.4

5.2 Contact between opponents is ...

  1. limited to legal blocking zones only
  2. limited to legal blocking zones and legal target zones. [Correct]
  3. unlimited
  4. limited to legal target zones only

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.2

5.2.1 Target Zones are...

  1. The part of the skater being used to perform a block
  2. The part of the skater being hit [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.2

5.2.1 Which of these are Legal Target Zones?

  1. The head
  2. Anywhere above the shoulders
  3. The mid and upper thigh (including the inner portion) [Correct]
  4. The hips [Correct]
  5. The chest, front and side of the torso [Correct]
  6. The arms and hands [Correct]
  7. On the back of the torso
  8. On the back of the booty/arse
  9. On the back of the thigh
  10. Below the mid-thigh

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.2

5.2.2 Which of these are Illegal Target Zones?

  1. The head [Correct]
  2. Anywhere above the shoulders [Correct]
  3. The mid and upper thigh (including the inner portion)
  4. The hips
  5. The chest, front and side of the torso
  6. The arms and hands
  7. On the back of the torso [Correct]
  8. On the back of the booty/arse [Correct]
  9. On the back of the thigh [Correct]
  10. Below the mid-thigh [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.2

5.2.3 Which of these are Legal Blocking Zones?

  1. Mid and upper thigh (including the inner portion) [Correct]
  2. Hips and booty [Correct]
  3. Torso [Correct]
  4. The arm from the shoulder to the elbow [Correct]
  5. Elbows
  6. Forearms
  7. Hands
  8. Head
  9. Below the mid thigh

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.2

5.2.3 Blocking Zones are ...

  1. The part of the skater being used to perform a block [Correct]
  2. The part of the skater being hit

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.2

5.2.4 Which of these are Illegal Blocking Zones?

  1. Mid and upper thigh (including the inner portion)
  2. Hips and booty
  3. Torso
  4. The arm from the shoulder to the elbow
  5. Elbows [Correct]
  6. Forearms [Correct]
  7. Hands [Correct]
  8. Head [Correct]
  9. Below the mid thigh [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/5.2

6 True or False: The initiator of a block is always responsible for the legality of their contact.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6 True or False: The initiator of a block is always responsible for the legality of contact.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6

6 Penalties are applied to ...

  1. only the skater
  2. a skater and the position they are currently playing [Correct]
  3. only the position a skater is currently playing

6 A Penalty is ...

  1. usually not important
  2. something which can be ignored
  3. a bonus
  4. a loss of advantage [Correct]
  5. a handicap [Correct]
  6. a punishment [Correct]
  7. a gain in advantage

6 If an illegal action is performed, but it is an action not given as a specific example in the rules...

  1. the action must be penalized using the rules as guiding examples [Correct]
  2. the action must be penalized using the referee's discretion
  3. the action must not be penalized

6.1 Blocking to the back is ...

  1. Hitting an opponent in the back of the legs or back of the booty only
  2. Hitting an opponent in the back of the torso, back of the legs, or back of the booty [Correct]
  3. Hitting an opponent in the back of the torso or back of the booty only
  4. Hitting an opponent in the back of the torso or back of the legs only
  5. Hitting an opponent in the back of the torso only

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1 One skater taps an opposing skater on the back. The skater being tapped ignores them. The skater doing the tapping may get ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

Note: Whilst there's grounds for this to be seen as intentional contact to an illegal blocking zone, and thus a Expulsion penalty, it would almost certainly be called by refs as incidental/no impact contact.

6.1 One skater taps an opposing skater on the back. The skater being tapped ignores them. The skater doing the tapping may get ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Note: Whilst there's grounds for this to be seen as intentional contact to an illegal blocking zone, and thus a Expulsion penalty, it would almost certainly be called by refs as incidental/no impact contact.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.1 Incidental contact with the back of an opponent which doesn't cause the opponent to adjust their skating stance is ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.1 If you touch an opposing skater on the back and it forces them to wobble on their skates, but they don't fall down, it's a...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.1 Incidental contact with the back of an opponent which doesn't cause the opponent to adjust their skating stance is ...

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.1.2 You make contact with the back of a skater causing them to wobble on their skates and skate out of bounds, but not fall over. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.2 You make contact with the back of an opposing skater. They don't fall over but do lose position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.2 You make contact with the back of an opposing skater causing them to fall over. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.2 Blue Blocker is chasing down Red Jammer and lightly impacts Red Jammer in the back who then falls over as a result. What is the call?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.2 If you touch an opposing skater on the back and it forces them to wobble on their skates, but they don't fall down, it's a...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.1.3 You make contact with the back of a skater causing them to wobble on their skates and skate out of bounds, but not fall over. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.1.3 You make contact with the back of an opposing skater causing them to fall over. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.1.3 You make contact with the back of an opposing skater. They don't fall over but do lose position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.1.3 Blue Blocker is chasing down Red Jammer and lightly impacts Red Jammer in the back who then falls over as a result. What is the call?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Back block minor Penalty
  3. Back block major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion
  5. Forearms major Penalty
  6. Forearms minor Penalty

6.1.3 A skater makes an unsuccessful but negligent and conscious attempt to block another skater illegally on the back, this is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Note: Remember, the rules say you get the expulsion "whether or not the action was successful".

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.3 A skater makes reckless illegal contact with the back of another skater, this is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.3 If you accidentally push an opposing skater in the back, forwards past an opposing skater, and don't cause them to fall over, it's a ...

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

Note: Whilst many referees would likely use their discretion to call this as a Minor, the skater being given the "advantage" has lost their established position making this a Major.

6.1.3 A skater makes an intentional and conscious effort to block another skater to the back and there is contact. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.1

6.1.4 A skater makes reckless illegal contact with the back of another skater, this is a/an ...

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.1.4 A skater makes a conscious effort to block another skater to the back. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.1.4 A skater makes an unsuccessful but negligent and conscious attempt to block another skater illegally on the back, this is a/an ...

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

Note: Remember, the rules say you get the expulsion "whether or not the action was successful".

6.2 Which of these will not result in Expulsion:

  1. Pulling of the head, neck or helmet.
  2. Intentional, negligent, or reckless contact above the shoulders.
  3. Any contact with the head of a skater not wearing a helmet.
  4. Choking.
  5. Complimenting an opposing skater on their tights. [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.2

6.2 A skater makes incidental contact with their teammate's head, causing their team mate to wobble but not fall over. This is a/an:

  1. Expulsion
  2. Major Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.2

6.2 Which of these is it impossible to get if a skater blocks to the head:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.2.1 Contact to the head that is secondary is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.2

6.2.2 Any block with initial contact landing above the shoulders is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.2

6.2.3 Any block with initial contact landing above the shoulders is ...

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.2.4 A skater makes contact to the head of another skater who is not wearing a helmet. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.2

6.2.4 A skater makes a conscious attempt to contact an opposing skater above the shoulders, but fails and falls on their arse/booty. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.2

6.2.4 A skater makes contact with the head of another skater who is not wearing a helmet. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.2.5 A skater makes a conscious attempt to contact an opposing skater above the shoulders, but fails and falls on their arse/booty. This is a/an:

  1. Expulsion [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Major Penalty

6.2.6 A skater attempts, and fails, to choke another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.2

6.2.7 A skater attempts, and fails, to choke another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.3 Which of these will not get you an Expulsion?

  1. Intentional tripping with feet or hands
  2. Slide tackling an opponent
  3. Kicking another skater
  4. Attempting, but failing, to slide tackle an opponent
  5. "Falling small" and accidentally low blocking an opposing skater [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3 True or False: Any contact which lands on an opponent's feet or legs, below the legal target zone, that causes the skater to stumble or fall is considered tripping and/or low blocking.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3 Which of these will not get you Expulsion?

  1. Intentional tripping with feet or hands
  2. Slide tackling an opponent
  3. Kicking another skater
  4. Attempting, but failing, to slide tackle an opponent
  5. "Falling small" and accidentally low blocking an opposing skater twice in one game [Correct]
  6. "Falling small" and accidentally low blocking an opposing skater three times in one game [Correct]

6.3 True or False: Any contact which lands on an opponent's feet or legs, below the legal target zone, that causes the skater to stumble or fall is considered tripping and/or low blocking.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.3 A skater is knocked down and falls small. During the fall, if they exit then re-enter the track are they subject to tripping/low blocking penalties?

  1. Yes [Correct]
  2. No

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.1 If two skaters make contact with each other's wheels during normal skating motion, this is...

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.3.1 If two skaters make contact with each other's wheels during normal skating motion, this is...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.2 A skater "falls small" to avoid tripping other players, this is ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.3.2 A skater "falls small" to avoid tripping other players, this is ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.3 A skater contacts an opposing skater below the legal target zone whilst outside of normal skating motion, causing them to stumble but not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.3.3 A skater contacts an opposing skater below the legal target zone whilst outside of normal skating motion, causing them to stumble but not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.4 Any contact between skaters' wheels or skates that is outside normal skating motion which causes an opponent to stumble but not fall is a/an...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.4 Any contact between skaters' wheels or skates that is outside normal skating motion which causes an opponent to stumble is subject to ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.3.5 A downed skater re-enters the track and accidentally causes an opposing skater to stumble, but not fall, by "low blocking" them. They are subject to a ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.5 A downed skater re-enters the track and accidentally causes an opposing skater to stumble, but not fall, by "low blocking" them. They are subject to a ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.3.6 If, outside of normal skating motion, Skater A contacts Skater B below the legal target zone and causes them to fall or lose their relative position, Skater A is subject to ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.6 If, outside of normal skating motion, Skater A contacts Skater B below the legal target zone and causes them to fall or lose their relative position, Skater A is subject to ...

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.3.7 A skater falls and accidentally sprawls on the track, causing an opponent to fall. This is likely to earn the downed skater a ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.3.7 A skater initiates contact with a part of the body below the legal blocking zone. The opposing skater falls. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.8 If skating within your normal skating motion keeps accidentally causing opposing skaters to stumble, at what point will you get a Major Penalty?

  1. When it's happened four or more times
  2. When it's happened three or more times [Correct]
  3. When it's happened two or more times
  4. The first time
  5. There is no limit

6.3.8 A skater falls then accidentally sprawls on the track, causing an opponent to fall. This is likely to earn the sprawling skater a ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.9 A skater is "falling small" yet repeatedly causing other skaters to stumble. At what point will they get a Major Penalty?

  1. After falling in this unsafe way three times or more [Correct]
  2. After falling in this unsafe way four times
  3. After falling in this unsafe way twice
  4. After falling in this unsafe way once
  5. They will never get a Major Penalty

6.3.9 If skating within your normal skating motion keeps accidentally causing opposing skaters to stumble, at what point will you get a Major Penalty?

  1. The first time
  2. When it's happened two or more times
  3. When it's happened three or more times [Correct]
  4. When it's happened four or more times
  5. There is no limit
  6. When it has happened enough to be classed as "habitual" [Correct]

Note: The WFTDA glossary defines habitual as "behavior that occurs three or more times over the course of a bout".

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.10 A downed skater re-enters the track and causes an opposing skater to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.3.10 A skater is "falling small" yet repeatedly causing other skaters to stumble. At what point will they get a Major Penalty?

  1. When the number of times is classed as "habitual" [Correct]
  2. They will never get a Major Penalty
  3. After falling in this unsafe way once
  4. After falling in this unsafe way twice
  5. After falling in this unsafe way three times or more [Correct]

Note: The rule says "habitual", which is defined in the glossary as three or more times.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.11 A skater intentionally trips another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.3.11 A downed skater re-enters the track and causes an opposing skater to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.12 A skater slide tackles an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.3.12 A skater intentionally takes a knee to avoid a block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.13 A skater tries, but fails, to kick an opponent with the intention of tripping them. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.3.13 A skater intentionally trips another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.14 A skater slide tackles an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.3.15 A skater tries, but fails, to kick an opponent with the intention of tripping them. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.3

6.4.1 True or False: When engaging another skater, elbows may not be swung with a forward/backward motion.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.2 True or False: When engaging another skater, elbows may be swung with upward or downward motion.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.3 To avoid a Use of Elbows penalty whilst blocking, the elbow used with the arm doing the blocking must be...

  1. bent [Correct]
  2. straight
  3. comfortable

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.4 True or False: Contact may be made exclusively with the point of the elbow

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.5 True or False: You can use your elbows to "hook" an opposing player.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.6 A skater makes contact with their elbow on an opposing skater which forces the opposing skater off balance. The opposing skater does not fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.6 A skater makes contact with an opposing skater using the elbow and moves them forwards, but does not cause them to lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.6 A skater swings their elbow in such a way that it causes an opposing skater slightly off balance but does not cause them to lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.6 Temporary contact with an elbow, which doesn't cause the opponent to adjust their skating stance, is a ....

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.4.6 Incidental contact with an elbow, which doesn't cause the opponent to adjust their skating stance, is a ....

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.4.6 Temporary contact with an elbow, which doesn't cause the opponent to adjust their skating stance, is a ....

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.6 Incidental contact with an elbow, which doesn't cause the opponent to adjust their skating stance, is a ....

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.7 A skater makes contact with an opposing skater using the elbow and moves them forwards, but does not cause them to lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.4.7 A skater makes illegal contact with their elbow on an opposing skater above the shoulders. The opposing skater does not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.7 A skater swings their elbow in such a way that it causes an opposing skater slightly off balance but does not cause them to lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.4.8 A skater makes contact with their elbow and an opposing skater above the shoulders. The opposing skater does not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.4.8 A skater makes contact with their elbow on an opposing skater which forces the opposing skater off balance. The opposing skater does not fall, but does lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.9 A skater uses their elbow to "pin" another skater's arm and impede their skating. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.9 A skater impedes an opponent's mobility by hooking the opponent's arm. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.9 A skater makes contact with their elbow on an opposing skater which forces the opposing skater off balance. The opposing skater does not fall, but does lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.4.10 A skater tries, and fails, to intentionally use their elbow to contact another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Note: The rules state the Expulsion is issued if there's an "attempt", even if it's not successful.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.10 A skater intentionally uses their elbow in an illegal manner to make contact with an opposing skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.4

6.4.10 A skater uses their elbow to "pin" another skater's arm and impede their skating. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.4.11 A skater tries, and fails, to intentionally use their elbow to contact another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.4.11 A skater intentionally uses their elbow to make contact with an opposing skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.5 Which of these will not get you Expulsion (when done with your hands or forearms)?

  1. Holding or pinning another skater to the ground
  2. Choking by the helmet straps
  3. Pulling of the head, neck, or helmet
  4. Punching another skater
  5. Shoving an opponent
  6. Illegally and accidentally contacting another opponent above the shoulders [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.1 True or False: Forearms or hands can be used to grab, hold, or push an opponent.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.2 If your hand accidentally touches another skater's hand this is:

  1. Not against the rules but might make you blush [Correct]
  2. Against the rules and you will be punished

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.3 During forearm contact between skaters, which of the following are indications that a push has occurred?

  1. The initiating skater extends their arm during contact [Correct]
  2. The receiving skater is propelled forwards or sideways [Correct]
  3. The receiving skater extends their arm during contact
  4. The initiating skater is propelled forwards or sideways

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.4 A skater is absorbing a hit and has pulled their forearms in to their body, but the forearms still touch the opposing skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.4 A skater makes temporary contact using their forearms on a legal target zone of an opposing skater. The opposing skater does not need to adjust their skating at all. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.5.5 A skater makes temporary contact using their forearms on a legal target zone of an opposing skater. The opposing skater does not need to adjust their skating at all. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.5 A skater gives an opposing skater a slight but observable push with the hands or forearms, it does not cause the opposing skater to lose their relative position but does cause them to wobble on their skates. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.5 A skater is absorbing a hit and has pulled their forearms in to their body, but the forearms still touch the opposing skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.5.5 A skater shoulder blocks an opposing skater and accidentally pushes the opposing skater forwards (but not over) with their forearms. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.5.1 A skater uses their hand (unintentionally) and gives an opponent a slight push. The opponent does not lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5.5

6.5.5.1 A skater makes a shoulder check on an opponent and as they do so they subsequently push with their forearm. The receiving skater is propelled forwards, but does not lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5.5

6.5.6 True or False: A block initiated with the shoulder in which there is forearm contact to the opponent but no observable push with the forearm will result in a Major Penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.6 True or False: A block initiated with the shoulder in which there is forearm contact to the opponent but no observable push with the forearm will result in a Minor Penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.5.6 Blue Jammer lightly rests their hand on Red Blocker's back and it lasts for more than 3 seconds, but there is no observable impact. What is the penalty?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.6 True or False: As long as your hand is resting on an opponent's legal target zone, and you are not causing them to alter their skating, you can keep your hand there as long as you want.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.7 Any illegal contact with hands or forearms above the shoulders results in ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.7.1 A skater gives an opposing skater a slight but observable push with the hands or forearms, it does not cause the opposing skater to lose their relative position but does cause them to wobble on their skates. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.5.7.2 A skater shoulder blocks an opposing skater and accidentally pushes the opposing skater forwards (but not over) with their forearms. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.5.8 True or False: As long as your hand is resting on an opponent's legal target zone, and you are not causing them to alter their skating, you can keep your hand there as long as you want.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.5.8 Blue Jammer lightly rests their hand on Red Blocker's back and it lasts for more than 3 seconds, but there is no observable impact. What is the penalty?

  1. Forearms minor [Correct]
  2. Forearms major
  3. Back block minor
  4. No call, legal scenario

6.5.8 Pushing an opposing skater forwards (and causing them to lose relative position) using your hands is a ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.8 If a skater uses their forearms to push an opposing skater sideways, and the skater being pushed does not fall over but does lose relative position, this is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.8 A skater gets a Minor Penalty if they rest their hand on an opposing skater for more than ...

  1. 1 second
  2. 2 seconds
  3. 3 seconds [Correct]
  4. 4 seconds
  5. 5 seconds
  6. One minute
  7. 0 seconds

6.5.8 A skater makes illegal hand contact with an opposing skater, causing the opposing skater to lose their relative position (but not fall). This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.8.2 If you cause an opposing skater to lose advantage by grabbing or holding them, it is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5.8

6.5.9 A skater punches an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.9 A skater punches a teammate. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.9 A skater touches their hand on an opposing skater above the shoulders. The opposing skater does not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.5.9 Any illegal contact with hands or forearms above the shoulders results in ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.5.10 Pushing an opposing skater forwards (and causing them to lose relative position) using your hands is a ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.5.10 One skater pins a teammate to the ground. This is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Note: Punching or pinning any skater (teammate or opponent) is an Expulsion.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.10 A skater makes illegal hand contact with an opposing skater, causing the opposing skater to lose their relative position (but not fall). This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.5.10.1 If a skater uses their forearms to push another skater sideways, and the skater being pushed does not fall over but does lose relative position, this is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.5.10.2 If you cause an opposing skater to lose advantage by grabbing or holding them, it is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.5.11 One skater tries, and fails, to shove an opposing skater with their forearms. This is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.5

6.5.15 One skater tries, and fails, to shove an opposing skater with their forearms. This is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.6 True or False: The head may not be used to block an opponent.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.6

6.6 A skater makes incidental contact with their team mate, causing their team mate to wobble but not fall over. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.6.1 A skater makes incidental contact with their head on an opposing skater, forcing them off balance but not out of position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.6

6.6.1 One skater incidentally makes contact with their head on an opposing skater. The opposing skater does not need to adjust their skating stance or position in any way. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.6

6.6.1 One skater accidentally makes contact with their head on an opposing skater. The opposing skater does not need to adjust their skating stance or position in any way. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.6.2 A skater makes contact with their head on an opponent skater, forcing them off balance. The opposing skater does not fall over, but does lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.6

6.6.2 A skater makes incidental contact with their head on an opposing skater, forcing them off balance but not out of position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.6.3 A skater makes contact with their head on an opponent skater, forcing them off balance. The opposing skater does not fall over, but does lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.6.3 A skater initiates a block with the head. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.6

6.6.4 A skater initiates a block with the head. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.6.4 A skater intentionally blocks with the head in an illegal manner. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.6

6.6.5 A skater intentionally blocks with the head in an illegal manner. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.7 Red Blocker A pushes Red Blocker B into Blue Blocker, maintaining contact with Red Blocker B. Red Blocker B contacts Blue Blocker legally. What does the ref call against Red Blocker A?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Multi-player minor Penalty
  3. Multi-player major Penalty
  4. Forearms major Penalty

6.7 Red Blocker A pushes Red Blocker B into Blue Blocker, maintaining contact with Red Blocker B. Red Blocker B contacts Blue Blocker legally. What does the ref call against Red Blocker A?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Multi-player Major Penalty
  3. Forearms Major Penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.1 True or False: It is legal for skaters to grab and hold each other's uniform or equipment to execute a multi-player block

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.2 True or False: Skaters may not use their hands in any holding fashion in a multi-player block.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.7.3 Which of these is potentially a multi-player block:

  1. Touching and assisting teammates to create a wall to impede an opponent [Correct]
  2. Touching and assisting teammates to create a wall to prevent receiving a block from an opponent [Correct]
  3. Touching and assisting teammates and not impeding an opponent
  4. Assisting teammates with a "whip" in a way which does not impede an opponent

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.4 For an action to be an illegal multi-player block, what must be the case?

  1. The multi-player link may not be that which is not blocking or impeding an opponent
  2. The multi-player link must be that which is blocking or impeding an opponent [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.5 If a skater temporarily pulls on their teammate's clothing to gain speed and does not impede an opposing skater, this is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.7.5 If a skater temporarily pulls on their teammate's clothing to gain speed and does not impede an opposing skater, this is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.5 Using a member of your own team to slow down in a way which does not block an opposing skater is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.6 Using a member of your own team to slow down in a way which does not block an opposing skater is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.7.6 Which of these can you do whilst blocking, to make sure you are not executing a multi-player block (assume this is the only linking action taking place)?

  1. Touch a teammate [Correct]
  2. Grab a teammate
  3. Hold a teammate

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.7 The point of contact between two skaters holding each other on the same team is not impeding an opposing skater whilst one of them is being blocked. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.7.8 Two skaters perform a multi-player block, impeding an opposing skater, but don't cause the opposing skater to fall or lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion
  4. It depends how long the multi-player block lasts

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.8 Two skaters perform a multi-player block for two seconds, impeding an opposing skater but not causing them to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.8 Two skaters perform a multi-player block for two seconds, causing an opposing skater to fall or lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Note: The rule says that it is a Major for any impedance (even if they don't fall) for any amount of time.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.8 How long can a multi-player block be maintained before it is a Major Penalty (assume the multi-player block is impeding an opposing skater, and assume the opposing skater does not fall or lose relative position)?

  1. 3 seconds
  2. 5 seconds
  3. 2 seconds
  4. 4 seconds
  5. There is no time limit
  6. 1 second
  7. No time [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.8 Two skaters perform a multi-player block for two seconds, impeding an opposing skater but not causing them to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.7.9 Two skaters perform a multi-player block for two seconds, causing an opposing skater to fall or lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.7.9 Reckless contact with an opponent while executing a multi-player block in an illegal manner is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.9 Two skaters intentionally attempt a forceful multiplayer-block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.7

6.7.10 How long can a multi-player block be maintained before it is a Major Penalty (assume the multi-player block is impeding an opposing skater, and assume the opposing skater does not fall or lose relative position)?

  1. There is no time limit
  2. 4 sectons
  3. 2 seconds
  4. 5 seconds
  5. 3 seconds [Correct]
  6. 1 second
  7. No time

6.7.10 Two skaters perform a multi-player block for more than three seconds, but don't cause an opposing skater to fall or lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.7.11 Two skaters intentionally attempt a forceful multiplayer-block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.7.11 Reckless contact with an opponent while executing a multi-player block in an illegal manner is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.8.1 Where must skaters be when initiating a block to avoid an Out of Bounds penalty?

  1. in the pack
  2. anywhere on track
  3. in bounds [Correct]
  4. behind an opponent

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.2 Where must skaters be when they begin to pick up momentum to perform a block?

  1. in the pack
  2. partially on track
  3. in bounds [Correct]
  4. behind an opponent

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.3 Red skater is blocked by Blue skater and straddles the boundary line. Red counter-blocks Blue skater. What do the refs call against Red skater?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Skating out of bounds minor
  3. Blocking out of bounds minor [Correct]
  4. Cutting minor

6.8.3 At what point must the initiator of a block cease blocking?

  1. After the opponent is completely out of bounds
  2. Before the initiator's skates have crossed the outside track boundary [Correct]
  3. After the initiator's skates have crossed the outside track boundary
  4. When the opponent has reached but not crossed the outside track boundary
  5. When the opponent has some part of their skate outside track boundary

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.3 Which parts of an initiating blocker's skate may touch the ground outside the track boundary

  1. No part [Correct]
  2. Two wheels
  3. One skate
  4. Both skates
  5. As long as there is one part of the skates inside the the track boundary, it's fine

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.4 True or False: A skater who is in bounds must yield right of way to an out of bounds skater

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.5 True or False: A skater may initiate contact with an opponent who is completely outside the track boundary

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.6 True or False: A skater is returning to the track and has some part (not all) of their skates outside of the track territory. They are a target and can be hit.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.6 An in bounds skater may actively block or hit a returning skater when ....

  1. both of the returning skater's skates are completely within the track territory
  2. both of the returning skater's skates are touching any in bounds track territory
  3. any part of the returning skater's skates are touching any in bounds track territory [Correct]
  4. no part of the returning skater's skates are touching any in bounds track territory

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.6 A returning skater has crossed the track boundary but remains out of bounds by definition as long as ...

  1. any part of their skates are still touching any out of bounds territory [Correct]
  2. both of their skates are touching any out of bounds territory
  3. neither of their skates are touching any out of bounds territory

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.7 A skater continues to counter-block after one of their skates has made contact with the ground outside the track boundary. Their opponent does not fall or lose their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.7 A skater is straddling the track boundary line, which of the following can they do?

  1. neither engage, block, or assist [Correct]
  2. assist
  3. block
  4. engage
  5. only block and assist

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.8 Why may a skater who is straddling the line be hit by a skater who is on the track?

  1. the straddling skater has one foot down inside the track boundary [Correct]
  2. the skater on the track is willing to get a penalty
  3. the straddling skater has neither foot down inside the track boundary
  4. the straddling skater never went out of play
  5. the skater on the track is out of play

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.8 True or False: A skater who is straddling the line may be hit by a skater who is on the track.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.9 A Jammer jumps the apex of a corner (jumps from in bounds and lands in bounds, upright and skating). Whilst in the air the Jammer was:

  1. In bounds [Correct]
  2. Out of bounds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.9 True or False: If you jump, your in bounds/out of bounds status doesn't change until you land.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.10 True or False: If a downed skater is re-entering the track but has fallen small, they can not be subject to blocking out of bounds penalties.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.10 True or False: A skater who has fallen small and is re-entering the track can be subject to blocking out of bounds penalties.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.10 True or False: If a downed skater who fell small is re-entering the track, they are subject to blocking out of bounds penalties.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.11 True or False: There is no penalty for blocking a skater who has jumped off both skates and left contact with the track from in bounds.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.11 True or False: It is not possible to "legally" block a skater who has jumped and is not touching the floor.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.11 True or False: There is no penalty for blocking a skater who has jumped off both skates and left contact with the track from in bounds.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.12 If a skater has one foot in bounds, and the other foot over the boundary line, but not touching the floor, and they block another skater, they are ...

  1. not blocking from out of bounds [Correct]
  2. blocking from out of bounds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.12 True or False: If a skater is blocking and has one foot on the ground and on the track, and the other foot hovering (but not touching) outside the track boundary, they are blocking out of bounds.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.13 A skater re-enters from out of bounds, does not make contact with any other skater or cause any opponent to lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.13 A skater re-enters from out of bounds, does not make contact with any other skater or cause any opponent to lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.13 If a skater re-enters the track from out-of-bounds whilst down, but does not make any contact with an opposing skater, or cause them to fall or lose relative position, this is blocking from out of bounds.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.13 If a skater re-enters the track from out-of-bounds whilst down, but does not make any contact with an opposing skater, or cause them to fall or lose relative position, this is a/an ...

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.14 A skater continues to counter-block after one of their skates has made contact with the ground outside the track boundary. Their opponent does not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.14 Red Blocker is being blocked off the track by Green Blocker and continues to counter-block past the point where part of Red Blocker's skate is touching the ground outside the track boundary. Green Blocker doesn't fall or lose relative position. For Red Blocker this is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.14 A skater who is out of bounds makes contact with an opposing skater, but does not cause them to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.14 A skater who is out-of-bounds makes light contact with an in-bounds skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.14 A skater being blocked off the track continues to counter-block when part of their skate is touching the ground outside the track boundary. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.14 A skater who is out-of-bounds makes light contact with an in-bounds opposing skater, the in-bounds opposing skater does not fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.15 A skater continues a block they initiated, after their skate has crossed the track boundary line. The opposing skater does not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.15 A skater continues a block they initiated, after their skate has crossed the track boundary line. The opposing skater does not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.16 A skater makes contact with an opposing skater who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary. The opposing skater's ability to re-enter play is not affected. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.16 A skater makes contact with an opponent who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary, but it does not affect the opposing skater's ability to re-enter play. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.16 A skater makes contact with an opposing skater who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary. The opposing skater's ability to re-enter play is not affected. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.16 A skater makes contact with an opponent who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary, but it does not affect the opposing skater's ability to re-enter play. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.17 A downed skater re-entering play makes contact with an opposing skater, but does not cause them to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.17 A downed skater is re-entering the track from out of bounds when they make contact with an opposing skater. This does not cause the opposing skater to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.17 A downed skater is re-entering the track from out of bounds when they make contact with an opposing skater. This does not cause the opposing skater to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.17 A downed skater re-entering play makes contact with an opposing skater, but does not cause them to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.8.18 A skater blocks from out of bounds and causes the receiving opposing skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.18 An out of bounds skater makes contact with an in bounds skater and causes them to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.18 An out of bounds skater makes contact with an in bounds skater and causes them to lose relative position, but not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.18 Whilst out of play a skater accidentally and forcefully contacts a member of their own team and causes the receiving skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Note: As with many (but not all) of the rules, you only get penalised if it's an opponent you hamper.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.18 An out of bounds skater makes contact with an in bounds skater and causes them to lose relative position, but not fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.18 An out of bounds skater makes contact with an in bounds skater and causes them to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.18 A skater blocks from out-of-bounds and causes the receiving opposing skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.18 A skater accidentally blocks a member of their own team from out-of-play and causes the receiving skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

Note: As with many (but not all) of the rules, you only get penalised if it's an opponent you hamper.

6.8.19 A skater continues a block past the point where a part of the initiating Blocker is touching out of bounds. The receiving skater falls. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.19 A skater continues a block past the point where any part of the initiating Blocker is touching out of bounds. The receiving skater falls. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.19 Green Blocker blocks a Red Blocker out of bounds, and continues to block until one of the Green Blocker's skates touches out of bounds. The Red Blocker falls. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.19 Green Blocker blocks a Red Blocker out of bounds, and continues to block until one of the Green Blocker's skates touches out of bounds. The Red Blocker falls. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.20 A downed skater re-enters the track from out of bounds and forces an opposing skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.20 A downed skater re-enters the track from out of bounds and forces an opposing skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.20 A downed skater re-enters the track from out of bounds causing an opposing skater to lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.20 A downed skater re-enters the track from out of bounds causing an opposing skater to lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.21 A skater makes contact with an opponent who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary and it affects the opposing skater's ability to re-enter play. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.21 An in bounds skater makes contact with an opposing skater who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary and causes them to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.21 A skater makes contact with an opponent who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary and it affects the opposing skater's ability to re-enter play. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.21 An in bounds skater makes contact with an opposing skater who is touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary and causes them to fall. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.8.22 A skater makes intentional contact with an out of bounds opponent whilst executing an illegal block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.8.22 A skater makes negligent contact with an out of bounds opponent whilst executing an illegal block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.22 A skater makes intentional contact with an out of bounds opponent whilst executing a forceful and illegal block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.22 A skater makes negligent contact with an out of bounds opponent whilst executing an illegal block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.8.22 A skater intentionally and egregiously blocks an out of bounds skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.8

6.8.22 A skater intentionally blocks an out-of-bounds skater. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

Note: For most illegal blocks, if it's intentional (so the skater executing the block is aware it's against the rules) it falls in the Expulsion penalty category.

6.9 A skater intentionally, but gently, clockwise blocks their own teammate. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9 With regards to clockwise blocks, if the illegal block affects a skater but does not cause them to fall and does not adversely affect the game it is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9 How is clockwise movement measured?

  1. Skates moving past a line perpendicular to the track boundaries [Correct]
  2. Skates moving past a line parallel to the track boundaries
  3. The direction skates are facing
  4. The direction the skater is facing

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9 A skater intentionally, but gently, clockwise blocks their own teammate. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9 True or False: Any block initiated by a clockwise skating player will result in either a Major Penalty or an Expulsion.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.9.1 True or False: Skaters must be skating and/or stepping in the counter-clockwise direction when executing a block.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.1 When can a skater execute a positional block?

  1. When stepping clockwise
  2. When stepping counter-clockwise [Correct]
  3. When skating in either direction
  4. When stationary
  5. When skating clockwise
  6. When skating counter-clockwise [Correct]
  7. When stepping in either direction

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.2 When can a skater give an assist to a non-stationary skater?

  1. When skating counter-clockwise [Correct]
  2. When skating clockwise
  3. When stationary
  4. When skating in either direction
  5. When stepping counter-clockwise [Correct]
  6. When stepping clockwise
  7. When stepping in either direction
  8. When skating counter-clockwise or when stationary

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.2 True or False: It is legal for a skater stopped on the track to give a whip to a teammate.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.2.1 True or False: If assisting a stationary or downed skater, a player giving the assist may be stationary.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9.2

6.9.2.1 True or False: If assisting a stationary or downed skater, a player giving the assist may also be stationary.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9.2

6.9.3 When are skaters permitted to skate clockwise on the track?

  1. When they do not block, assist or otherwise engage teammates or opponents [Correct]
  2. When they do not block, assist or otherwise engage opponents
  3. When they do not block, assist or otherwise engage teammates
  4. Never
  5. When they do not block opponents

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.4 When are skaters permitted to stop on the track?

  1. When they do not block, assist or otherwise engage upright & skating teammates
  2. When they do not block, assist or otherwise engage opponents
  3. When they do not block, assist or otherwise engage upright & skating teammates or opponents [Correct]
  4. Never
  5. When they do not block opponents

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.4.1 A Blocker who comes to a stop on the track whilst blocking ...

  1. may continue the block then must cease all engagement
  2. must cease all engagement [Correct]
  3. may continue the block

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9.4

6.9.5 True or False: Skaters may skate clockwise out of bounds when exiting the penalty box

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.5 True or False: When exiting the penalty box skaters may only skate counter-clockwise out of bounds.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.6 Which direction must a Skater be facing in order to block and/or assist?

  1. Any direction [Correct]
  2. Forwards
  3. Backwards

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.7 A skater incidentally touches another skater after being spun around after a block, but doesn't cause them to fall and does not adversely affect the game. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.7 A skater incidentally touches another skater after being spun around after a block, but doesn't cause them to fall and does not adversely affect the game. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.8 A skater, while stopped on the track, assists a downed teammate to an upright position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.8 A skater unintentionally blocks an opponent whilst travelling clockwise, the recipient of the block does not need to adjust their skating stance or relative position in any way. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.9 A skater, while stopped on the track, assists a downed teammate to an upright position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.9 A skater gives an assist to a teammate and comes to a stop. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.10 A skater gives an assist to a teammate and comes to a stop. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.11 A skater clockwise blocks an opponent who becomes off balance but does not fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.11 A skater positionally clockwise blocks an opponent who becomes off balance but does not fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.12 A stationary skater positionally blocks an opponent, forcing the opponent sideways but not to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.12 A stationary skater blocks an opponent, forcing the opponent sideways but not to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.12 Whilst stopped a skater positionally blocks an opponent who becomes off balance but does not fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.13 If Skater A is skating clockwise and Skater B receives an assist from them, who is given the Direction of Gameplay Penalty?

  1. Whichever skater benefits most from the assist
  2. The initiator of the assist [Correct]

6.9.13 A skater, whilst blocking an opposing skater, comes to a stop on the track. They resume counter-clockwise skating at the first legal opportunity and cease engagement. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.13 A clockwise stepping skater gives an assist, the recipient does not improve their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.14 A skater, whilst blocking an opposing skater, comes to a stop on the track. There is no legal opportunity to move counter-clockwise and the skater ceases engagement. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.14 If Skater A is stationary and Skater B receives an assist from them, who is given the Direction of Gameplay Penalty?

  1. Whichever skater benefits most from the assist
  2. The initiator of the assist [Correct]

6.9.14 A stopped skater gives an assist, but this does not improve the relative position of the recipient of the assist. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.15 A skater executes a clockwise block which forces an opposing skater out of bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Expulsion
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Minor Penalty
  4. No Impact/No Penalty

6.9.15 A stationary skater blocks an opponent (the block includes physical contact), forcing the opponent sideways but not to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.15 A skater travels backwards, clockwise, and bumps gently into an opposing skater. The opposing skater is gently pushed so one of their skates crosses the track boundary. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.9.16 A skater blocks whilst stationary. The receiver of the block is forced out of their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.9.16 A clockwise stepping skater gives an assist, the recipient does not improve their relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.17 A skater clockwise blocks (including physical contact) an opposing skater causing the opposing skater to move backwards slightly, but not to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.17 A skater clockwise blocks (including physical contact) an opposing skater causing the opposing skater off-balance, but not to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.17 A skater is stepping clockwise and gives an assist which improves the recipient's relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.9.17 A skater gets an assist, by taking a hip whip from a clockwise travelling teammate, and improves their position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.9.18 A skater, whilst blocking an opposing skater, comes to a stop on the track. They do not resume counter-clockwise skating at the first legal opportunity. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.18 A stationary skater gives an assist which improves the recipient's relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.9.19 A skater clockwise blocks an opposing skater causing the opposing skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.19 A player skates clockwise and gets distracted by somebody in the crowd. They accidentally forcefully block a fellow teammate. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

Note: Whilst 6.9.3 implies you can't block your teammate, the rules only cover assisting your teammates and blocking your opponents

6.9.19 A player intentionally clockwise blocks an opponent in an illegal manner. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.9.19 A player begins an unintentional clockwise block and gets distracted by somebody in the crowd. They accidentally, forcefully, and illegally clockwise block an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

Note: This is one situation where the outcome would likely dictate what the penalty is at the discretion of a referee, however the rules state that negligent clockwise contact with an opponent (whilst executing a clockwise block) is an Expulsion.

6.9.20 A skater is stationary and blocks an opposing skater causing the opposing skater to go out of bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.20 A skater is stationary and blocks an opposing skater causing the opposing skater to lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.20 A skater is stationary and blocks an opposing skater causing the opposing skater to fall. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.20 A stationary player intentionally blocks an opponent in an illegal manner. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.9.20 An intentionally stationary player negligently blocks an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.9.21 A stopped skater gives an assist and this improves the relative position of the recipient of the assist. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.22 A player begins an unintentional clockwise block and gets distracted by somebody in the crowd. They negligently, forcefully, and illegally clockwise block an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.22 A player intentionally clockwise blocks an opponent in an illegal manner. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.23 An intentionally stationary player negligently blocks an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.9.23 An intentionally stationary player consciously blocks an opponent in an illegal manner. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.9

6.10 If two blockers are responsible for an Out of play action, which is eligible to be penalised?

  1. Neither
  2. Both [Correct]
  3. The foremost blocker
  4. The rearmost blocker

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10 Which one of the following groups is penalised more heavily with regards to Out of play penalties?

  1. Blockers (including Pivots)
  2. Jammers
  3. Pivots
  4. All actions are to be penalized equally regardless of position [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10 True or False: Out of Play penalties are applied for actions that illegally destroy the pack.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10 If an out of play action affects a skater but does not cause harm or adversely affect the game, it is treated as a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.10.1 Which of these must happen in order for a skater to be given an out of play penalty?

  1. If a warning has begun being issued, it must be completed
  2. They receive an out of play warning
  3. None of these [Correct]
  4. They receive more than one out of play warnings

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.1 True or False: A referee is not required to issue an Out of play warning prior to giving an Out of play penalty?

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

6.10.1 True or False: A referee is not required to issue a warning prior to giving an out of play penalty

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.1 True or False: A warning must be issued in order for an Out of Play penalty to be given

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.2 True or False: "No Pack" can be defined if there are two or more groups of Blockers equal in number on the track, and one single group meets the pack definition.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

6.10.2 True or False: "No Pack" can be defined if there are two or more groups of Blockers equal in number on the track, they are more than 10 feet away from each other, and no single group meets the pack definition.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

6.10.2 Illegally destroying the pack is...

  1. ... the illegal creation of a "no pack" situation [Correct]
  2. ... any creation of a "no pack" situation

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.2 Who is responsible for maintaining a legally defined pack?

  1. both teams [Correct]
  2. both Pivots
  3. both Jammers
  4. the foremost Pivot
  5. the rearmost Pivot
  6. the foremost team
  7. the rearmost team

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.2.1 Which of these is an example of illegally destroying the pack, or creating a "no pack" situation? A skater, skaters or team ...

  1. coast to drop back more than 10 feet (3 meters) behind the opposing team [Correct]
  2. take a knee [Correct]
  3. intentionally fall [Correct]
  4. intentionally skate out of bounds [Correct]
  5. accidentally fall
  6. are blocked out of play
  7. coast to drop back 5 feet (1.5 meters) behind the opposing team

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10.2

6.10.2.1 Which of these is an example of illegally destroying the pack, or creating a "no pack" situation? A skater, skaters or team ...

  1. accidentally fall
  2. intentionally skate out of bounds [Correct]
  3. intentionally fall [Correct]
  4. take a knee [Correct]
  5. coast to drop back more than 10 feet behind the opposing team [Correct]
  6. are blocked out of play
  7. coast to drop back 5 feet behind the opposing team

6.10.2.1.1 True or False: The rules define pack speed.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10.2

6.10.2.1.1 Which of these warrants illegal destruction of the pack penalties?

  1. gradually deviating from the speed of the pack as established through game play
  2. suddenly deviating from the speed of the pack as established through game play [Correct]
  3. deviating from the speed of the pack in such a way as to leave the opposing team no opportunity to adjust and maintain a pack [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10.2

6.10.2.1.2 True or False: At the start of a jam if one team skates forward and the opposing team remains stationary, no penalties for illegally destroying the pack shall be enforced.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.10.2.2 True or False: If a skater's, or group of skaters', actions create a no-pack situation they must be penalized as directed in the rules.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.10.2.2 True or False: If a skater's, or group of skaters', actions create a no-pack situation they may be penalized as directed in the rules.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10.2

6.10.2.3 Pack destruction as a result of gameplay are ...

  1. considered illegal pack destruction.
  2. not considered illegal pack destruction. [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10.2

6.10.2.3.2 A skater destroys the pack by attempting a block on an opposing skater. They ...

  1. have illegally destroyed the pack only if they miss the target of their block
  2. have illegally destroyed the pack.
  3. have not illegally destroyed the pack. [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10.2

6.10.2.4 When no single skater or team can be clearly found responsible for illegally destroying the pack, who gets the penalty?

  1. Nobody [Correct]
  2. The nearest skater from both teams to the Pack Ref
  3. The nearest Pivot to the Pack Ref
  4. The foremost Pivot
  5. The foremost in-bounds Blocker

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10.2

6.10.3 Who may Jammers initiate engagement with when outside the Engagement Zone?

  1. Nobody
  2. Jammers [Correct]
  3. Pivots
  4. Blockers
  5. Bench managers
  6. Any other skater
  7. Pivots and Jammers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.3 True or False: Jammers may initiate engagement with Jammers outside the Engagement Zone.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.4 True or False: Jammers may initiate a block on Blockers who are out of play (outside the engagement zone) without penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.4 If, outside the Engagement Zone, a Blocker illegally engages with a Jammer, what can the Jammer legally do?

  1. Nothing
  2. Counter-block [Correct]
  3. Counter-block then Block normally

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.4 True or False: Jammers may initiate engagement with Blockers outside the Engagement Zone.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.4 True or False: If a Jammer illegally engages a Blocker outside the Engagement Zone, the Blocker may Counter-block and go unpenalized

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.5 True or False: If a Blocker initiates engagement with an opponent outside the Engagement Zone, the illegally engaged opponent may Counter-block and go unpenalized.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.5 True or False: Blockers may initiate engagement outside the Engagement Zone.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.6 True or False: Out of Play skaters will likely be warned to re-enter the Engagement Zone, however, the referee doesn't need to warn the skaters prior to issuing Out Of Play penalties

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.10.6 True or False: A referee doesn't need to warn a skater who is out of play prior to issuing a Failure to Return to the Engagement Zone penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Note: This is one of the few penalties where it's given after a failure to respond to a warning. The rule states the skater "will be warned" to return, so the penalty can not be issued without a warning first. Though remember, no warning needs to be given to issue other OOP penalties, e.g. Blocking OOP.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.7 True or False: During a No Pack situation skaters will be warned that there is no pack, but will be penalized if they do not immediately attempt to reform the pack.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.8 True or False: Skaters may not assist teammates outside the Engagement Zone.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.9 A No Pack situation arises with no measurable impact on game play. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.9 A skater contacts an opposing skater whilst out of play which does not force the opponent to adjust their skating stance in any way. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.10.10 A No Pack situation arises with no measurable impact on game play. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.10.10 A skater contacts an opposing skater whilst out of play which does not force the opponent to adjust their skating stance in any way. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.10 A skater contacts an opposing skater whilst out of play which forces the opposing skater off-balance, but not to fall or lose relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.11 A skater assists a teammate whilst out of play. This affects the recipient but does not improve relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.11 If two blockers do not attempt to return to the Engagement Zone after being warned, what penalties are given?

  1. Both skaters are given Major penalties
  2. The farthest skater from the Engagement Zone is given a Major penalty
  3. Both skaters are given Minor penalties [Correct]
  4. The farthest skater from the Engagement Zone is given a Minor penalty
  5. The farthest skater from the Engagement Zone is given a Major penalty, the other skater is given a Minor penalty

6.10.11 A skater, after being warned, does not immediately attempt to re-enter the Engagement Zone. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.10.12 If two blockers do not attempt to return to the Engagement Zone after being warned, what penalties are given?

  1. The farthest skater to the Engagement Zone is given a Major penalty
  2. Both skaters are given Major penalties [Correct]
  3. The nearest skater from the Engagement Zone is given a Major penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.12 A skater, after being warned, does not immediately attempt to re-enter the Engagement Zone. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.13 A No Pack situation occurs. After a warning, a skater who is out of bounds fails to immediately attempt to reform a pack. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.13 After a "No Pack" warning, a skater who is most responsible fails to immediately attempt to reform. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.14 A Blocker re-enters the pack from behind, having lapped the pack. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.15 A Blocker re-enters the pack from the front, having been lapped by the pack. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.16 After a warning there is a sustained failure to reform a pack. This is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.17 A Blocker, whilst out of play, blocks an opposing skater and forces them out of their established position. This is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.17 A Blocker, whilst out of play, blocks an opposing skater causing them to fall. This is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.18 A skater illegally destroys the pack. This is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.18 Should an assist which results in a no pack situation be penalized for illegally destroying the pack? Situation: 4 green Blockers are 8 feet in front of 1 white Blocker. The remaining white Blockers are 4 feet behind the front-most white Blocker. The front-most white Blocker assists her Jammer. As a result of the assist the front-most white blocker abruptly slows down, destroying the pack and is now 12 feet behind the green Blocker. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

6.10.19 A skater initiates an assist whilst out of play which improves the recipient's relative position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.10.20 A skater intentionally initiates an egregious block on an opposing skater whilst out of play. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.10

6.11 When does a skater who is skating out of bounds become eligible for Cutting the Track penalties?

  1. when they are in an out of bounds position and are upright
  2. when they are in an out of bounds position
  3. when they return to an in bounds position and are upright and skating [Correct]
  4. when they return to an in bounds position and are upright
  5. when they return to an in bounds position
  6. when they are in an out of bounds position and are upright and skating

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11 True or False: Skaters can drop back while in play to undo or avoid Cutting the Track penalties.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11 True or False: Skaters must be upright and skating to receive Cutting the Track penalties.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11 True or False: You can not get Cutting the Track penalties if there is a No Pack situation.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

6.11 During a No Pack scenario a Jammer straddling the track boundary passes an opposing Blocker then skates back in bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11 True or False: You can not get Cutting the Track penalties if there is a No Pack situation.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.11 During a No Pack scenario a Jammer straddling the track boundary passes the foremost opposing Blocker then skates back in bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

Note: Remember, there's no "in-play" opposing blockers (if there were this would be a Major) if there's a No Pack scenario.

6.11 True or False: When judging Cutting the Track penalties, only opposing skaters that are passed are counted.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11 True or False: A skater that is in bounds need not yield the right of way to an out of bounds skater.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11 True or False: A downed skater may receive Cutting the Track penalties.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.1 The outcome and aftermath of a block are complete when the receiving skater has ...

  1. reestablished control of their own self on the track [Correct]
  2. fallen
  3. returned in-bounds
  4. stopped
  5. skated out of bounds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.1 White Blocker knocks Black Blocker out of bounds, but then goes out of bounds herself. Black Blocker then re-enters the track in front of that White Blocker. What penalty is given to Black Blocker?

  1. "Cutting The Track" Minor.
  2. "Cutting The Track" Major.
  3. "Blocking Out of Bounds" Minor.
  4. No Penalty. [Correct]

6.11.1 White Blocker knocks Black Blocker out of bounds, but then goes out of bounds herself. Black Blocker then re-enters the track in front of that White Blocker. What penalty is given to Black Blocker?

  1. "Cutting The Track" Major.
  2. "Blocking Out of Bounds" Major.
  3. No Penalty. [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.1 Which of the following is an exception under which a skater may return in bounds in front of the skater who blocked them out of bounds?

  1. When the initiating skater is a Pivot
  2. When the initiating skater has been given a penalty but has not yet left the track [Correct]
  3. When the initiating skater has been sent off the track for a penalty [Correct]
  4. When the initiating skater goes out of bounds at any time after the initiating block [Correct]
  5. When the initiating skater downs themselves or falls at any time after the initiating block [Correct]
  6. When the initiating skater exits the Engagement Zone at any time after the initiating block [Correct]
  7. When the initiating skater exits the Pack at any time after the initiating block
  8. When the initiating skater is a Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.1 True or False: If a skater's hips are in front of a Blocker who initiates a block, pushing the skater out of bounds, the skater can return in front of the initiating blocker.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.1 Which of these will improve a skater's relative position?

  1. Re-entering the track from out of bounds in front of the initiator of the block which pushed them out [Correct]
  2. Re-entering the track from out of bounds behind the initiator of the block which pushed them out

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.1 If a Blocker is pushed out of bounds whilst in front of the initiator of the block, where should they come back in bounds?

  1. In front of the initiator of the block
  2. Behind the initiator of the block [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.1.1 True or False: A skater may return in bounds in front of a skater who blocked them out of bounds if the initiating skater is considered "in the box".

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11.1

6.11.1.2 True or False: A skater may not return in bounds in front of a skater who blocked them out of bounds even if the initiating skater also goes out of bounds

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11.1

6.11.1.3 True or False: A skater may return in bounds in front of a skater who blocked them out of bounds if the initiating skater falls.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11.1

6.11.1.3 True or False: A skater may only (and under no other circumstances) return in bounds in front of a skater who blocked them out of bounds if the initiating skater falls.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Note: If the initiating skater doesn't fall but instead skates out of bounds, the skater knocked out may return in bounds.

6.11.1.4 True or False: A skater may return in bounds in front of a skater who blocked them out of bounds if the initiating skater exits the Engagement Zone at any time after the initial block.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11.1

6.11.2 Skaters are straddling the track boundary line when ...

  1. they are simultaneously touching both inside and outside the track boundary line [Correct]
  2. they are alternating between touching only the inside and outside of the track boundary line
  3. they are touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary line
  4. they are touching the track exclusively inside the track boundary line

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.2 True or False: Airborne skaters are considered straddling skaters.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.2 Straddling skaters are subject to Cutting the Track penalties when they become...

  1. in bounds
  2. in bounds, upright and skating [Correct]
  3. out of bounds, upright and skating
  4. out of bounds
  5. they are not subject to cutting the track penalties

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.3 A skater re-enters the track having passed an out of bounds skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.3 A skater re-enters the track having passed a downed skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.3.1 An in bounds, upright and skating skater has re-entered the track from out of bounds having passed one in-play opposing skater which results in them having bettered their position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11.3

6.11.3.2 During a No Pack situation an in bounds, upright and skating skater has re-entered the track from out of bounds having passed one in-bounds teammate. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Note: Whilst it's a little unclear in the wording of the rules, the WFTDA have clarified that the normal cutting rules apply during a No Pack situation.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11.3

6.11.3.2 During a No Pack situation an in bounds, upright and skating skater has re-entered the track from out of bounds having passed one or more in-bounds opposing skaters. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Note: Whilst it's a little unclear in the wording of the rules, the WFTDA have clarified that the normal cutting rules apply during a No Pack situation.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11.3

6.11.4 A skater re-enters the track having passed an out of bounds skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.4 A skater re-enters the track having passed a downed skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.4 A skater re-enters the track having passed an in-bounds skater who a ref has just given a Major penalty. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.4 A skater re-enters the track having passed a skater who is "in the box," having been sent off the track for a penalty. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.5 A skater re-enters the track having passed a skater who is "in the box," having been sent off the track for a penalty. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.5 A skater straddles the track boundary line then completely exits the track having passed two other skaters while straddling. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.5 A skater re-enters the track having passed an in-bounds skater who a ref has just given a Major penalty. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.6 A skater straddles the track boundary line then completely exits the track having passed two other skaters while straddling. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.6 An out of bounds skater steps one foot inside the track boundary line to become a straddling skater, passes two skaters, and then steps back completely out of bounds. With regard to Cutting the Track penalties, this is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.7 An out of bounds skater steps one foot inside the track boundary line to become a straddling skater, passes two skaters, and then steps back completely out of bounds. With regard to Cutting the Track penalties, this is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.7 A skater re-enters the track in front of the skater who blocked them out. The initiator of the block has exited the Engagement Zone. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.8 An in bounds, upright and skating skater has re-entered the track from out of bounds having passed one in-play skater (assume they're not the foremost) which results in them having bettered their position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.9 An in bounds, upright and skating skater has re-entered the track from out of bounds having passed one in-play teammate. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. No Pass/No Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.9 An upright skater straddling the track boundary passes one in-play skater (who is not the foremost in-play opposing skater), then moves in bounds resulting in them having bettered their position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.10 One Jammer cuts the opposing Jammer outside of the engagement zone. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.10 A Jammer betters their position relative to another Jammer by re-entering the track from out of bounds in front of them, outside of the Engagement Zone. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.10 An in bounds, upright and skating skater has re-entered the track from out of bounds having passed one in-play opposing skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.11 An in bounds, upright and skating skater has re-entered the track from out of bounds having passed two in-play team-mates. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.11 True or False: A Jammer passes another Jammer by straddling the line, outside of the Engagement Zone, this is a Major Penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.11.12 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds (not from the box) having passed a teammate during a No Pack scenario. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.12 True or False: During a no pack situation, Cutting the Track penalties do not apply.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.11.12 True or False: You can't get an Expulsion for Cutting the Track.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.11

6.11.12 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds (not from the box) having passed an opposing skater, bettering their position, during a No Pack scenario. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.13 A skater straddles the line, passes in front of a teammate and re-enters the track during a No Pack scenario. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.14 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds passing one in-play teammate and one in-play opposing skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.14 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds passing two teammates. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.15 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds passing an opposing skater who is the foremost in-play Blocker. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.15 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds passing their teammate who is the foremost in-play Blocker. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

Note: There is a rule which says you get a Major for passing the foremost opposing skater, however if it's your own team mate you're passing it's only a minor.

6.11.16 A skater skates out of bounds, passes multiple other skaters, then skates back in bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.16 A skater skates out of bounds, passes two of their teammates, then skates back in bounds. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.16 A skater straddles the line, passes one of their teammates and one opposing skater, then skates back in-bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.16 A skater straddles the line, passes two of their teammates, then skates back in-bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.17 A skater straddles the line whilst passing the foremost opposing blocker (who is not the foremost blocker as a teammate is ahead of them) then skates back in bounds. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.17 A skater straddles the line whilst passing the foremost opposing blocker then skates back in bounds. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.18 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds (not from the box) having passed one teammate and the opposing Jammer during a No Pack scenario. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.18 A skater re-enters the track from out of bounds (not from the box) having passed multiple teammates during a No Pack scenario. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.18 A skater straddles the line, passes one of their teammates and the opposing Jammer, then skates back in-bounds. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.11.19 During a No Pack scenario a skater straddles the line and passes multiple skaters before skating back in bounds. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.11.20 True or False: You can not get an Expulsion for Cutting the Track

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.12 True or False: Skaters may not pick up momentum for a block until in bounds.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.1 A skater is forced out of bounds by an opponent's block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.1 A skater is forced out of bounds by an opponent's block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.12.1 A skater is forced out of bounds by an opponent's block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.2 A skater attempts to block an opponent, misses and goes out of bounds as a result. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.2 A skater attempts to block an opponent, succeeds but skates out of bounds as a result. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.2 A skater attempts to block an opponent, misses and goes out of bounds as a result. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.12.2 A skater attempts to block an opponent, succeeds but skates out of bounds as a result. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.12.3 A skater increases speed whilst skating to the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.12.3 A skater increases speed whilst skating out of bounds to the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.3 A skater is returning from the penalty box. They maintain their speed whilst out of bounds. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.3 A skater maintains speed whilst skating from the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.12.4 A skater exits the track due to an equipment failure. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.12.4 A skater exits the track to avoid a fallen skater. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.12.4 A skater exits the track due to an equipment failure. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.4 True or False: A skater exits the track due to injury. This is a Skating out of Bounds Penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.4 True or False: A skater exits the track due to injury. This is a Minor Skating out of Bounds Penalty.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

6.12.4 A skater exits the track to avoid a fallen skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.5 A skater skates out of bounds to avoid a block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.12.5 A skater skates out of bounds to avoid a block. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.6 A skater skates out of bounds to increase speed. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.6 A skater skates out of bounds to maintain speed. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.6 A skater skates out of bounds to increase speed. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.12.6 A skater skates out of bounds to maintain speed. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.12.7 A skater skates across the track infield in a manner which substantially cuts short the lap distance. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.12.7 True or False: A skater must pass an in bounds skater to commit a "skating out of bounds" major penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.12.7 A skater skates across the track infield in a manner which substantially cuts short the lap distance. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.12.8 True or False: A skater can get an Expulsion penalty for skating out of bounds.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.12.8 True or False: A skater can get an Expulsion penalty for skating out of bounds.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.12

6.13 Technical infractions that give the offending team an advantage but do not necessarily impact a specific opponent are classed as...

  1. Illegal procedures [Correct]
  2. Insubordination
  3. Misconduct
  4. Minor Penalties

6.13 Technical infractions that give the offending team an advantage but do not necessarily impact a specific opponent are known as:

  1. No Impact/No Penalties
  2. Major Penalties
  3. Expulsions
  4. Illegal Procedures [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13 True or False: Illegal Procedures are technical infractions that give the offending team an advantage but do not necessarily impact a specific opponent.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.1 A Blocker is skating into position when the first whistle blows and is on track, between the Jammer and Pivot lines. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.1 True or False: A Jammer or Blocker who false starts must yield advantage or be assessed a Major Penalty.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.1 True or False: If a false-starting Blocker or Jammer yields advantage but the opposing Jammer or Blocker does not take advantage, neither Jammer nor Blocker will be assessed a penalty.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.1.1 True or False: An Illegal Procedure is committed when a Jammer false starts for being out of position at the jam-starting whistle, when that Jammer is touching beyond the Jammer Line.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13.1

6.13.1.2 A non-Pivot Blocker false starts for being out of position at the jam-starting whistle when the Blocker:

  1. Lines up behind of a Pivot Blocker's hip.
  2. Is touching on or beyond the Pivot Line. [Correct]
  3. Is touching on or behind the Jammer Line. [Correct]
  4. Lines up in front of a Pivot Blocker who is upright and on the Pivot Line. [Correct]
  5. Is touching outside the track boundary.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13.1

6.13.1.3 A Pivot Blocker false starts for being out of position at the jam-starting whistle when the Pivot Blocker:

  1. Is touching beyond the Pivot Line. [Correct]
  2. Is touching on or behind the Jammer Line. [Correct]
  3. Is touching on the Pivot Line.
  4. Is touching on or outside the Track Boundary.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13.1

6.13.1.3.1 True or False: A Pivot Blocker false starts for being out of position at the jam-starting whistle when the Pivot Blocker is touching beyond the Pivot Line.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13.1

6.13.1.3.2 True or False: A Pivot Blocker false starts for being out of position at the jam-starting whistle when the Pivot Blocker is touching on or behind the Jammer Line.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13.1

6.13.2 A skater assists a downed teammate whilst within the Engagement Zone. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.2 A false start by a Jammer or Blocker who yields advantage is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.3 A Blocker who is on the track, between the Jammer and Pivot lines, skating into position when the jam-starting whistle blows is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.3 A skater is incorrectly told they have served their penalty and leaves the penalty box. They are instructed to go back and finish their penalty, and they do. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.4 A skater who has established their position on the track, but is blocked out of bounds before or during the first whistle is...

  1. Told to return to their bench
  2. Allowed to remain in the jam without penalty [Correct]
  3. Allowed to remain in the jam and given a Minor Illegal Procedure penalty
  4. Allowed to remain in the jam by must give way to the skater who blocked them out

6.13.4 Assisting a downed teammate within the Engagement Zone results in a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.5 If a falsestarting skater yields their advantage but the opposing skater does not take advantage...

  1. neither skater will be awarded an additional penalty [Correct]
  2. the falsestarting skater will be awarded an additional penalty
  3. the opposing skater will be awarded an additional penalty
  4. both skaters will be awarded an additional penalty

6.13.5 A Jammer is on the track but is in front of the Jammer line when the Jammer whistle is sounded. They stop and yield advantage to the other Jammer. What happens?

  1. They receive an illegal procedure major penalty.
  2. They receive an illegal procedure minor penalty. [Correct]
  3. They do not receive a penalty.
  4. They are excluded from the rest of the jam.

6.13.5 A skater exiting the penalty box before their penalty time finishes after being incorrectly instructed to do so by the penalty box official, must return to the box and finish the penalty and will be assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.5 A Jammer or Blocker who false starts must...

  1. yield advantage [Correct]
  2. return to bench
  3. serve 1 minute in the penalty box
  4. think about what they've done and feel bad

6.13.5.1 When does a Jammer false start?

  1. when they are touching beyond the Jammer line at the Jammer starting whistle [Correct]
  2. when they are touching beyond the Jammer line at the Jam starting whistle
  3. when they are touching the Jammer line at the Jammer starting whistle
  4. when they are touching the Jammer line at the Jam starting whistle

6.13.5.2 In which of the following situations would a Non-Pivot Blocker false start?

  1. touching in front of the Jammer line
  2. lines up in front of a Pivot Blocker who is on the Pivot line [Correct]
  3. touching behind the Jammer line [Correct]
  4. touching on or beyond the Pivot line. [Correct]
  5. lines up behind a Pivot Blocker who is on the Pivot line.
  6. touching behind the Pivot line.

6.13.5.3 In which of the following situations does a Pivot risk false starting?

  1. touching in front of the Jammer line
  2. lines up in front of a Pivot Blocker who is on the Pivot line
  3. touching on or behind the Jammer line [Correct]
  4. touching beyond the Pivot line. [Correct]
  5. lines up behind a Blocker who is on the Pivot line
  6. touching behind the Pivot line

6.13.6 A skater who establishes starting position on the track before the jam-starting whistle, but is blocked out of bounds prior to or as the whistle blows will be allowed to remain in the jam and will be assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.6 There is one too many skaters on the track when a jam starts. What happens?

  1. The extra skater is instructed to return to their bench, no penalty
  2. The extra skater is instructed to return to their bench, minor penalty [Correct]
  3. The extra skater will skate this jam, minor penalty
  4. The extra skater will skate this jam, major penalty

6.13.6 There are too many skaters on the track. One skater is instructed to return to their bench. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.6 A Team sends 5 Blockers onto the track instead of 4. After the first whistle, one of the skaters is instructed to return to their bench. What penalty is given to this skater?

  1. "Illegal Procedure" Minor. [Correct]
  2. "Illegal Procedure" Major.
  3. No Impact/No Penalty

6.13.7 If there are two Pivots on one team on the track during a jam, but the correct number of skaters, what happens?

  1. Both of the Pivots will be issued a major penalty and told to return to their bench
  2. Nothing
  3. Both of the Pivots will be issued a minor penalty and told to return to their bench
  4. One of the Pivots will be issued a major penalty and told to return to their bench
  5. One of the Pivots will be issued a major penalty, but be allowed to stay on track
  6. One of the Pivots will be issued a minor penalty and told to return to their bench [Correct]
  7. One of the Pivots will be issued a minor penalty, but be allowed to stay on track

Note: A published clarification of the rules in 2009 (no longer online, I assume due to the 2010 rules superseding it) states that the Extra Pivot is an Extra Skater, so must return to their bench. (Thanks to Bob Humbug, Dallas Derby Devils for the clarification help)

6.13.7 If there are two Pivots from the same team on track but the referee calling the Illegal Procedure penalty doesn't know which one entered the track last, which Pivot gets the penalty?

  1. The foremost Pivot
  2. The Pivot on the track farthest to the referee
  3. The Pivot on the track closest to the referee [Correct]
  4. Neither
  5. The rearmost Pivot
  6. One of the Pivots, chosen at random

6.13.7 Too many skaters on the track. The extra skater is instructed to return to the bench without stopping the jam and is also assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.7 There's more than one designated Pivot for a team on the track after the starting whistle. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.8 If a team fields Two Pivots, one is an extra skater, and the referee instructs one to return to their bench, the skater returning to their bench is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.8 True or False: If a team fields two Blockers with Pivot helmet covers on and two additional Blockers, all four skaters will be allowed to remain on track if the last Blocker to enter the track wearing the Pivot helmet cover removes their helmet cover.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.8 True or False: Any Pivot starting in the penalty box is not the designated Pivot for that jam.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.8 True or False: When an Illegal Procedure is called for an extra Pivot on the track, the skater can remove the helmet cover if that skater is an extra Pivot, but the team otherwise has the correct number of Blockers.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.8 True or False: If there is more than one Pivot on the track for a given team, the Pivot closest to the referee who calls the penalty (if the referee doesn't know which Pivot entered the track last) will be instructed to return to the bench if they are an extra skater.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.8 A Jammer attempts to call off a jam when they are not Lead Jammer, and the jam is not called off. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.9 A Jammer attempting to call off a jam without establishing Lead Jammer status (when the jam is not subsequently called off as a result) is subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.9 A skater entering the track from the penalty box re-enters in front of one teammate who's part of the pack. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.9 A skater entering the track from the penalty box re-enters in front of one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.10 A skater entering the track after being waived off a full penalty box re-enters the track in front of one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.10 A skater exiting the penalty box and re-entering the track in front of one pack skater of the same team will be assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.11 A skater, after being waived off of a full penalty box, re-entering the track in front of one pack skater of the same team is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.11 A skater enters the track after addressing a mid jam equipment malfunction and re-enters the track in front of one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.11 Skater C is sent off the track for a Blocking to the Head Penalty and headed to the box. Skater C got waived off because the Penalty Box was full. Skater C then proceeds to re-enter the Jam in front of one of their team-mates. Skater C is then assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.12 A skater, after addressing mid jam equipment malfunction, re-entering the track in front of one pack skater of the same team. This skater is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.12 A skater engages an opponent before the first whistle, causing them off balance but doesn't cause them to lose their established starting position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.12 True or False: A skater, after addressing mid jam equipment malfunction, can re-enter the track in front of two pack skaters of the same team without being sent to the penalty box.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.13 A skater initiating contact on an opponent before the jam-starting whistle that forces the receiving opposing skater off balance, forward, or sideways, but does not cause the opposing skater to lose the established starting position. This skater is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.13 A penalized skater leaves the penalty box during an official timeout to talk to their team-mates. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.13 A penalized skater leaves the penalty box during a team timeout. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.13 A skater engaging an opponent before the jam-starting whistle that forces the receiving opposing skater off balance, forward, or sideways, but does not cause the opposing skater to lose the established starting position.

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.14 During a timeout, a penalized skater's teammate enters the designated penalty box area to communicate with the penalized skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.14 A skater initiating contact or engaging an opponent after the fourth whistle ending the jam that forces the opposing skater slightly off balance, forward or sideways but does not cause the opposing skater to fall is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.14 During a timeout, a penalized skater's non-skating Manager enters the designated penalty box area to communicate with the penalized skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty for the Captain [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty for the Skater
  4. Expulsion for the Manager
  5. Minor Penalty for the Skater
  6. Major Penalty for the Captain
  7. Minor Penalty for the Manager

6.13.14 Initiating contact on an opponent after the fourth whistle that causes the opposing skater to lose balance sideways but not fall or go out of bounds will result in a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.15 A penalized skater removes their helmet whilst in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.15 A Blocker starting the jam with more than one knee down will earn a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.15 A Blocker starting the jam with more than one knee down can be called for a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.15 A penalized skater removes a piece of safety equipment (other than a mouth guard) whilst in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.15 A penalized skater adjusts their helmet whilst in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.15 A penalized skater removes their mouth guard whilst seated in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.16 A Jammer false starts but does not yield advantage. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.16 A Blocker false starts but does not yield advantage. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.16 A Blocker or Jammer false starts. They stop sprinting forward in an attempt to yield but choose not to stop all forward motion. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.16 A skater exits the penalty box and re-enters the track in front of one opposing pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.17 A skater forces a jam to be called off due to there being too many skaters on the track. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.17 Who gets the penalty when: a jam is called off for too many skaters on the track and the offending team did not field a Pivot, and the referees are not sure who the last Blocker on the track was.

  1. Captain
  2. Pivot
  3. Closest Blocker to referee who made the call [Correct]

6.13.17 A skater is waived off a full penalty box and re-enters the track in front of one opposing pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.18 A skater has an improper uniform. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.18 A skater, after addressing a mid jam equipment malfunction, re-enters the track in front of one opposing skater who is in the engagement zone but NOT in the pack. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Note: The skater would get a Major penalty if they re-entered in front of an opposing pack skater. The opposing skater in the question is not in the pack.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.18 A skater has improper jewellery. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.18 A skater has improper skates. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.18 A skater, after addressing a mid jam equipment malfunction, re-enters the track in front of one opposing pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.19 A Jammer who is not Lead Jammer successfully calls off a jam. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.19 A penalized skater leaves the penalty box during a team timeout. This is a/an:

  1. Expulsion
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. No Impact/No Penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.20 During a timeout, a penalized skater's non-skating Manager enters the designated penalty box area to communicate with the penalized skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty for the Skater
  3. Expulsion for the Manager
  4. Major Penalty for the Captain [Correct]
  5. Minor Penalty for the Manager

6.13.20 During a timeout, a penalized skater's teammate enters the designated penalty box area to communicate with the penalized skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.20 A skater violates the Passing the Star procedures. This is a/an (for the initiator of the star pass):

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.20 A skater violates the Passing the Star procedures. This is a/an (for the intended receiver of the star pass who did not violate anything):

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.13.21 A penalized skater adjusts their helmet whilst in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.21 A skater illegally blocks a star pass. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.21 A penalized skater removes their helmet whilst in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.21 A penalized skater removes their mouth guard whilst seated in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.21 A penalized skater removes a piece of safety equipment (other than a mouth guard) whilst in the penalty box. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.22 A Blocker false starts but does not yield advantage. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.22 A Blocker or Jammer false starts. They stop sprinting forward in an attempt to yield but choose not to stop all forward motion. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.22 A Jammer or Blocker who false starts and fails to yield advantage by continuously rolling forward will be assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.22 A Jammer false starts but does not yield advantage. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.22 Pivots Blue 20 and White 34 are lined up at the Pivot Line before the jam-starting whistle. Pivot Blue 20 has a toe stop on the Pivot Line while Pivot White 34 has a toe stop slightly beyond the Pivot Line. The referee calls an "Illegal Procedure False Start Yield" penalty on White 34. Who does the White 34 need to yield advantage to?

  1. Pivot Blue 20 [Correct]
  2. Pivot White 34
  3. Blue Jammer
  4. White Jammer
  5. Both Jammers
  6. All Pack Skaters
  7. Blue Pack Skaters
  8. White Pack Skaters

6.13.22 Pivots Blue 20 and White 34 are lined up at the Pivot Line before the jam-starting whistle. Pivot Blue 20 has a toe stop on the Pivot Line while Pivot White 34 has a toe stop slightly beyond the Pivot Line. The jam-starting whistle is blown. The referee then calls an "Illegal Procedure False Start Yield" penalty on White 34. Pivot White 34 stop all forward motion. The referee calls a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

6.13.22 Pivots Blue 20 and White 34 are lined up at the Pivot Line before the jam-starting whistle. Pivot Blue 20 has a toe stop on the Pivot Line while Pivot White 34 has a toe stop slightly beyond the Pivot Line. The jam-starting whistle is blown. The referee then calls an "Illegal Procedure False Start Yield" penalty on White 34. Pivot White 34 did not stop all forward motion. The referee calls a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

6.13.22 Pivots Blue 20 and White 34 are lined up at the Pivot Line before the jam-starting whistle. Pivot Blue 20 has a toe stop on the Pivot Line while Pivot White 34 has a toe stop slightly beyond the Pivot Line. The jam-starting whistle is blown. The referee then calls an "Illegal Procedure False Start Yield" penalty on White 34. Pivot White 34 stop all forward motion, however, Pivot Blue 20 did not take advantage of the attempt to yield position. Pivot White 34 continue to skate with the rest of the pack. The referee calls a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

6.13.22 A skater exits the penalty box and re-enters the track in front of more than one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.23 A skater forces a jam to be called off due to there being too many skaters on the track. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.23 Who gets the penalty when a jam is called off for too many skaters on the track, the offending team did not field a Pivot, and the referees are not sure who the last Blocker on the track was.

  1. Captain
  2. Pivot
  3. Closest Blocker to referee who made the call [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.23 A skater is waived off a full penalty box and re-enters the track in front of more than one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.24 A skater has improper jewellery. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.24 A skater has an improper uniform. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.24 A skater, after addressing mid jam equipment malfunction, re-enters the track in front of more than one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.24 A skater has improper skates. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.25 A skater exits the penalty box before their penalty time has finished (assume the penalty box official didn't instruct the skater to leave early). This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.25 A Jammer who is not Lead Jammer successfully calls off a jam. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.26 A skater violates the Passing the Star procedures. This is a/an (for the initiator of the star pass):

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.26 There are too many skaters and/or team support staff in the designated team area. Who gets a penalty?

  1. Nobody
  2. The current Pivot (or Captain if there's no Pivot) [Correct]
  3. The closest skater to the referee calling the penalty
  4. The Captain (even if there is a current Pivot)

6.13.26 There are too many skaters and/or team support staff in the designated team area. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.27 A skater illegally blocks a star pass. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.27 A skater removes their Mouthguard during a Jam whilst on the track. What happens?

  1. They receive an "Illegal Procedure" Major Penalty. [Correct]
  2. They receive an "Illegal Procedure" Minor Penalty.
  3. Nothing, as long as they replace it when instructed by a Referee.
  4. They are expelled from the Bout.

6.13.27 A skater removes required safety equipment during a jam. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.28 A skater exits the penalty box and re-enters the track in front of more than one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.28 A skater blocks an opponent before the first whistle and forces them out of their established starting position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.13.29 True or False: You can't get an Expulsion for an Illegal Procedure

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.13.29 A skater is waved off a full penalty box and re-enters the track in front of more than one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.30 A skater, after addressing mid jam equipment malfunction, re-enters the track in front of more than one pack skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.31 A skater exits the penalty box before their penalty time has finished (the penalty box official didn't instruct the skater to leave early). This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.32 There are too many skaters and/or team support staff in the designated team area. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.32 There are too many skaters and/or team support staff in the designated team area. Who gets a penalty?

  1. Nobody
  2. The current Pivot (or Captain if there's no Pivot) [Correct]
  3. The closest skater to the referee calling the penalty
  4. The Captain (even if there is a current Pivot)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.33 A skater removes their Mouthguard during a Jam whilst on the track. What happens?

  1. They receive an "Illegal Procedure" Major Penalty. [Correct]
  2. Nothing, as long as they replace it when instructed by a Referee.
  3. They are expelled from the Bout.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.33 A skater removes required safety equipment during a jam. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.34 Team White is lined up a foot from the Jammer Line while Team Blue is lined up a foot in front of Team White prior to the Jam start whistle. Team Blue begins to skate clockwise subsequently making physical contact with Team White which didn't cause any of the Team Which to lose established position, fall, or go out of bound. Skater Blue 12 continue to skate clockwise pushing Skater White 34 approximately six(6) inches closer to the Jammer Line. Skater White 34 didn't know fall, lose balance, or went out of bound. What type of penalty would be called on Skater Blue 12?

  1. Blocking to the Back
  2. Direction of Gameplay
  3. Illegal Procedure [Correct]
  4. Multi-Player Block
  5. No Penalty

6.13.34 Team White is lined up a foot from the Jammer Line while Team Blue is lined up a foot in front of Team White prior to the Jam start whistle. Team Blue begins to skate clockwise subsequently making physical contact with Team White which didn't cause any of the Team White to lose established position, fall, or go out of bound. Skater Blue 12 continue to skate clockwise pushing Skater White 34 approximately six(6) inches closer to the Jammer Line. Skater White 34 didn't know fall, lose balance, or went out of bound. What penalty is assessed to Skater Blue 12?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

6.13.34 Team White is lined up a foot from the Jammer Line while Team Blue is lined up a foot in front of Team White prior to the Jam start whistle. Team Blue begins to skate clockwise subsequently making physical contact with Team White which didn't cause any of the Team Which to lose established position, fall, or go out of bound. Skater Blue 12 continue to skate clockwise pushing Skater White 34 approximately six(6) inches closer to the Jammer Line. Skater White 34 didn't know fall, lose balance, or went out of bound. What penalty is assessed to Skater White 34?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

6.13.34 A skater blocks an opponent before the first whistle and forces them out of their established starting position. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.35 A skater has fouled out but been allowed to stay in the track area. They return to the designated bench area. The Captain is issued what penalty:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.35 A skater has fouled out but been allowed to stay in the track area. They interfere with the play or bout. The Captain is issued what penalty:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.36 Skaters intentionally start a jam laying on their backs to prolong the time taken to reform. Who gets a Major penalty?

  1. All skaters prolonging the time taken to reform
  2. The skater most able to reform
  3. No skaters
  4. The skater most responsible or the pivot [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.36 A skater intentionally starts a jam laying on their back to prolong the time taken to reform. This is a:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.37 At the jam-starting whistle the majority of Blockers are not in the correct position (e.g. not between the Pivot & Jammer lines) but the team has fielded a Pivot. Who gets a Major Illegal Procedure penalty?

  1. Any skater not in position
  2. The Pivot [Correct]
  3. Nobody
  4. The Captain

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.13.38 True or False: You can't get an Expulsion for an Illegal Procedure

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.13

6.14 True or False: Insubordination penalties will be given for actions which demonstrate a disregard for the authority of the referees and officials, whether intentional or not.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.1 True or False: Intentionally committing an Illegal Procedure is not insubordination.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.1 With regards to Insubordination penalties only, a skater intentionally commits an Illegal Procedure. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.14.1 A Skater intentionally commits an Illegal Procedure, but is not penalized for the infraction. Why?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

6.14.2 A skater was called for a Major Penalty and was subsequently signalled off the track. However the skater wilfully failed to leave the track. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.2 True or False: an Insubordination penalty is never a Minor penalty.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.14.3 True or False: A Major Penalty is assessed to a skater who uses obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at an official.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.3 A skater chooses not to leave the track for a penalty. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.14.3 The use of obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at an official will result in a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.4 A skater chooses not to leave the floor after fouling out. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.14.4 True or False: A skater willfully failing to leave the floor after fouling out warrants an expulsion from the game.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.4 Skater Red 5 was called for a Major Penalty and was subsequently signalled off the track. This penalty was his/her seventh trip to Penalty Box. However Skater Red 5 wilfully failed to leave the floor. What penalty will be assessed to Skater Red 5?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.4 A skater willfully failing to leave the floor after fouling out is assessed a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.5 A skater who makes repeated use of obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at an official will be subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.5 True or False: The repeated use of obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at an official will not result in an expulsion from the game.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.5 A skater is excessively insubordinate to a referee. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.14.6 Deliberate and excessive insubordination to a referee will result in a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.6 Any skater who is deliberately and excessively insubordinate to a referee will acquire a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.14.6 True or False: Deliberate and excessive insubordination to a referee is not grounds for an expulsion.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.14

6.15 True or False: Misconduct is always a Major penalty.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.15 True or False: Delay of Game penalties will be given for actions which cause skaters to skate slower.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.15

6.15.1 Delay of Game penalties will be given for actions which interfere with the standard progression of the game, and can only result in a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact/No Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.15

6.15.2 A penalized skater was waved off from a full penalty box right before the Jam came to its natural conclusion. The waived off skater then returns to his/her bench for the next Jam. This skater's act is now subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.15

6.15.2 True or False: One Delay of Game penalty will be assessed to each offending skater if they're not on track in time, whilst in the penalty box queue for the next jam.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.15

6.15.3 A team neglects to field any Blockers for the jam, they prevented the start of the jam and thus cause a Delay of Game. The referee assesses a penalty to the Captain. What type of penalty is assessed?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.15

6.15.3 A skater initiates contact with an opponent, whilst both the initiator's skates are off the ground. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.15.3 A skater initiates contact with their teammate, whilst both the initiator's skates are off the ground. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

Note: A WFTDA Rules Clarification on September 9th 2012 specified that initiating contact with a teammate whilst in the air is not a major.

6.15.4 True or False: A team successfully requesting a team timeout when they have none remaining. Penalty will be assessed to the Captain.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.15

6.15.4 A team has already used all three timeouts before the end of the bout. However they still request and successfully got another team timeout. The Captain will be assessed what type of penalty?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.15

6.15.4 A skater executes a block on a downed skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.15.4 True or False: It is legal to block a skater who is getting up after a fall.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

6.15.5 A skater blocks and initial contact is above the shoulders. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.15.6 A skater uses obscene, profane, or abusive language directed at an official. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.15.6 A skater uses obscene, profane, or abusive gestures directed at an audience member. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.15.6 A skater swears at a mascot. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty [Correct]
  4. Expulsion

6.15.7 A skater excessively uses obscene, profane, or abusive language directed at an opposing skater. This is a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. No Impact/No Penalty
  4. Expulsion

6.15.7 A skater uses obscene, profane, or abusive language directed at their own teammate. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion

Note: You can legally swear at your own team, but it's not advisable.

6.15.8 True or False: You can't get an Expulsion for Misconduct.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Note: If the action was serious enough to require an expulsion, it would be a Gross Misconduct penalty, not a Misconduct penalty.

6.16 Which of the following is not a Gross Misconduct Expulsion or Suspension:

  1. Jumping onto or into a pile of fighting skaters
  2. Slide tackling an opponent
  3. Deliberate and excessive insubordination to a referee [Correct]
  4. Initiating contact with both skates off of the ground [Correct]
  5. Holding or pinning another skater to the ground
  6. Shoving an opponent
  7. Serious physical violence
  8. Executing a block on an opponent who is down [Correct]
  9. Willfully failing to leave the floor after fouling out [Correct]

6.16 True or False: Gross Misconduct always results in an Expulsion or Suspension.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.16.1 Entry to the penalty box that causes contact only to persons intruding on either the safety lane and/or the penalty box is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.2 True or False: there's no such thing as a Gross Misconduct Minor.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.16.2 Contact, either actual or potential, by the skater's penalty seat to another person that is caused by a structural failure of the seat, not by the entry of the skater to the penalty box is subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.3 Entry to the penalty box causes a teammate to either move or be forcibly contacted is subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.3 True or False: there's no such thing as a Gross Misconduct Major.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

6.16.4 A skater illegally interferes with game-play whilst not involved in the jam. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.4 Initiating contact with both skates off of the ground that forces the receiving opposing skater off balance, forward, and/or sideways, but does not cause the opposing skater to lose the relative position is subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.5 A skater repeatedly uses obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at an official. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.5 Initiating contact with both skates off of the ground to a teammate is legal, regardless of the impact on that teammate. The impacted teammate is subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty [Correct]
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.5 True or False: Initiating contact with both skates off of the ground to a teammate is legal, regardless of the impact on that teammate.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.5 A skater repeatedly swears at a mascot. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.6 A skater repeatedly uses obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at an opposing skater, manager, or coach. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.6 Initiating contact with both skates off of the ground that forces the receiving opposing skater out of established position including forcing a skater down, out of bounds, or out of relative position is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.7 A skater intentionally, but unsuccessfully, attempts to trip an opponent. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.7 A skater intentionally trips an opponent with their feet or hands. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.7 Red Skater is on one knee when Blue Skater executes a block on Red Skater. Blue Skater is subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.8 A Skaters use of obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at a mascot, announcer, audience member, or other bout production individuals are subject to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.8 A skater takes part (engages with the fight beyond defending themselves) in a fight they did not start. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.9 A skater makes negligent contact above the shoulders with a teammate. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.9 A skater makes negligent contact above the shoulders with another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.9 A Jammer dislikes a call made by the referee and responds by using excessive obscene, profane, abusive language and, gestures directed at an opposing skater. This Jammer is subject to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.10 A skater enters the penalty box in such a way that it causes another person to vacate their position to reasonably avoid being forcibly contacted. This skater is subject to a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.10 A skater punches another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.11 A skater pulls on the helmet of another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.11 True or False: Regarding seats in the penalty box, a penalty is to be issued where proper precaution is not being shown by the offending skater, causing the habitual failure of a seat or seats.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Note: The WFTDA glossary defines habitual as "behavior that occurs three or more times over the course of a bout".

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.11 True or False: Regarding seats in the penalty box, a penalty is to be issued where proper precaution is not shown by a skater who causes the habitual failure of a seat or seats.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Note: The WFTDA glossary defines habitual as "behavior that occurs three or more times over the course of a bout".

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.11 A skater habitually enters the penalty box causing structural failure of seats. Such skater can be subjected to:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Note: The WFTDA glossary defines habitual as "behavior that occurs three or more times over the course of a bout".

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.11 Habitual entry to the penalty box where contact, either actual or potential, by the skater's seat to another person that's caused by a structural failure of the seat and not the entry of the skater (if the skater is not showing proper precaution) can result in a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty [Correct]
  3. Expulsion

Note: The WFTDA glossary defines habitual as "behavior that occurs three or more times over the course of a bout".

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.16

6.16.12 A skater's misconduct act cannot result a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Major Penalty
  3. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.12 A skater chokes another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.13 A skater makes contact with the head of a teammate who is not wearing a helmet. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.14 A skater kicks another skater. This is a/an:

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.16.14 What Penalty is given for intentionally kicking another skater?

  1. No Impact/No Penalty
  2. Minor Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Expulsion [Correct]

6.17 What is an indiscretion so serious that it justifies the instant expulsion of a skater, even on the first occurrence?

  1. Suspension
  2. Expulsion
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Misconduct
  5. Gross Misconduct [Correct]
  6. Insubordination
  7. Delay Of Game

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.3 Illegal interference in game-play by skaters or support staff not involved in the jam can result in a/an:

  1. Gross Misconduct
  2. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Misconduct

6.17.4 The repeated use of obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at a mascot, announcer, audience member, or other bout production individuals can result in a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]
  3. Gross Misconduct [Correct]
  4. Misconduct Penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.5 The repetitive and excessive use of obscene, profane, or abusive language or gestures directed at an opposing skater, teammate, manager, coach, or other support staff will result in a/an:

  1. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]
  2. Gross Misconduct Penalty [Correct]
  3. Misconduct Penalty
  4. Major Penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.6 True or False: Fighting is an automatic expulsion for all participants and may result in a suspension.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.6 True or False: A skater that only defends blows and does not engage in the fight will not be penalized.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.6 A fight is defined as a physical struggle that is not part of regular game play and is subject to a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. No Impact / No Penalty
  3. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]
  4. Misconduct Penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.7 Biting an opponent for any reason during a game is ground for a/an:

  1. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]
  2. Major Misconduct Penalty
  3. Gross Misconduct Penalty [Correct]
  4. Misconduct Penalty
  5. Major Penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.8 Jumping onto or into a pile of fighting skaters (i.e., "dog pile") is grounds for a/an:

  1. Major Penalty
  2. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]
  3. Major Misconduct Penalty
  4. Gross Misconduct Penalty [Correct]
  5. Misconduct Penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.9 Serious physical violence or any action deemed by the officials to cause an extraordinary physical threat is grounds for a/an:

  1. Misconduct Penalty
  2. Major Misconduct Penalty
  3. Major Penalty
  4. Gross Misconduct Penalty
  5. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

6.17.10 Entry to the penalty box that causes either the skater, the skater's seat, or another seat to forcibly contact another person including people correctly positioned in their team bench area and is not limited to people in the penalty box is subjected to a/an:

  1. No Impact / No Penalty
  2. Expulsion or Suspension [Correct]
  3. Misconduct Penalty
  4. Gross Misconduct Penalty [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/6.17

7.1.1 When a skater has earned a major penalty ...

  1. that skater will be sent to the penalty box at the time the penalty is issued [Correct]
  2. that skater will be sent to the penalty box after the jam
  3. that skater will be sent to the penalty box after the period
  4. that skater will be sent to the penalty box only after receiving 4 major penalties

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.1

7.1.1.1 How does a referee communicate a minor penalty to a skater?

  1. They don't
  2. A hand signal
  3. Verbally calling out the penalty to the skater
  4. Whistling, then verbally calling out the penalty to the skater
  5. A hand signal and verbally calling out the penalty to the skater [Correct]
  6. Whistling, then performing a hand signal and verbally calling out the penalty to the skater

7.1.1.1 True or False: The fourth minor penalty a skater receives is signaled with a whistle

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.1.1.2 True or False: If a skater has three Minor penalties, and receives a fourth Minor, they receive a Major penalty.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Note: The fourth Minor penalty is not a Major, it is simply a fourth Minor penalty and requires the skater to serve one minute in the penalty box.

7.1.1.2 True or False: Minor penalties are "reset" between periods.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.1.1.2 True or False: Minor penalties carry over into the following period. They are not "reset" between periods.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.1.1.2 How long must a skater who commits any four minor penalties serve in the penalty box?

  1. 1 minute [Correct]
  2. 2 minutes
  3. The remainder of the jam
  4. 20 seconds

7.1.2 How long do you serve in the Penalty Box for a single Major Penalty?

  1. 1 minute [Correct]
  2. 30 seconds
  3. 2 minutes
  4. 10 seconds
  5. 50 seconds
  6. 45 seconds
  7. 90 seconds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.1

7.1.2 Generally, if no one skater can be singled out to receive a minor penalty ...

  1. it will go to the skater nearest the referee making the call
  2. it will go to the Captain
  3. it will go to the active Pivot [Correct]
  4. it will not be issued

7.1.2 When do major penalties on blockers expire?

  1. one (1) minute after the skater has left the track
  2. after two (2) minutes served in the penalty box
  3. one (1) minute after the penalty is issued
  4. after one (1) minute served in the penalty box [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.1

7.1.4 If no one skater can be singled out to receive a major penalty (excluding illegally destroying the pack) ...

  1. the penalty is not issued
  2. the penalty goes to the active Pivot [Correct]
  3. the penalty goes to the Captain
  4. the penalty goes to the skater nearest the referee

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.1

7.2.1 True or False: Substitutions are allowed if a penalty carries over to the next jam (excluding expulsion, fouling out and injury).

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.1 When a skater has earned a major penalty ...

  1. that skater will be sent to the penalty box at the time the penalty is issued [Correct]
  2. that skater will be sent to the penalty box after the jam
  3. that skater will be sent to the penalty box after the period
  4. that skater will be sent to the penalty box only after receiving 4 major penalties

7.2.1.1 Under what situation must a penalised skater be substituted?

  1. If the penalised skater is tired
  2. If the penalised skater is the Jammer
  3. If the penalised skater has an expulsion [Correct]
  4. If the penalised skater has been injured [Correct]
  5. If the penalised skater has fouled out [Correct]
  6. If the penalised skater has received a misconduct penalty
  7. If the penalised skater is a Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.1

7.2.1.1 True or False: If a skater Fouls Out at the start of a jam they are permitted to return to play once they have served one minute in the penalty box.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.1

7.2.1.1 If a penalised skater has fouled out, when must they be substituted (assuming they are in the penalty box)?

  1. Between periods
  2. Between jams [Correct]
  3. Immediately
  4. Never

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.1

7.2.2 When do major penalties on blockers expire?

  1. one (1) minute after the skater has left the track
  2. after two (2) minutes served in the penalty box
  3. one (1) minute after the penalty is issued
  4. after one (1) minute served in the penalty box [Correct]

7.2.2 How long do you serve in the Penalty Box for a single Major Penalty?

  1. 1 minute [Correct]
  2. 30 seconds
  3. 2 minutes
  4. 10 seconds
  5. 50 seconds
  6. 45 seconds
  7. 90 seconds

7.2.2 True or False: a skater may skate either clockwise or counter-clockwise to the penalty box.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.2 When sent to the penalty box, when must a skater exit the track?

  1. Once the Jam is over
  2. Within 20 seconds
  3. Immediately [Correct]
  4. Whenever they want

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.2.1 True or False: Penalty timing begins when the skater exits the track.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.2 If the penalty box is full at the end of a jam and a skater receives a major penalty, when do they serve their penalty?

  1. In the next jam they skate in, which doesn't have to be the next jam
  2. In the next jam [Correct]
  3. Never

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.2 True or False: A team may have three blockers seated in the penalty box at one time.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.2.1 A skater was given a Major penalty, then was waived off from the penalty box as it was full. The jam ends before they sit their penalty. If the skater does not stay on track for the next jam they ...

  1. do not serve their penalty
  2. will serve their penalty the next time they are on track
  3. are penalised [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.2.1 When does a skater's penalty timing begin if they are sent for a major penalty during a jam and the jam is not called off?

  1. When the skater enters the penalty box area
  2. When the skater leaves the track and becomes out of bounds
  3. When the penalty is called by the referee
  4. When the skater is seated in the penalty box [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.2.2 The moment a penalized skater is directed off the track they...

  1. Are considered "in the box" but their penalty time does not begin until they are seated in the penalty box [Correct]
  2. Are considered "in the box" and their penalty time begins immediately
  3. Are not considered "in the box" and their penalty time does not begin, until they are seated in the penalty box

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.2.3 If there is only one Blocker from a given team on the track, they get a Major penalty and the penalty box has space for them, they ...

  1. Are instructed to exit the track
  2. Are instructed to stay on the track [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.2.3.1 There is only one Blocker from Red team on the track and they get a Major penalty. The penalty box has space for them. They will be sent to the penalty box...

  1. As soon as another Blocker from Red team joins the Pack [Correct]
  2. Immediately
  3. As soon as there are four (4) Blockers from Red team on the track
  4. As soon as another Blocker from Red team is on the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.3 True or False: A Jammer can never be waived off from the penalty box.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.3 If there are two Blockers, A and B, in the penalty box (neither with less than 10 seconds of penalty time remaining) and Blocker C from the same team is penalized, Blocker C will be...

  1. Told to sit in the available seat
  2. Instructed to stand and wait
  3. Waived off [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.2.3 If there are two Blockers in the penalty box and one has less than 10 seconds of penalty time remaining, a third penalized Blocker will be...

  1. Held in the box but will not begin serving their penalty time until there is only one Blocker in the box
  2. Waived off
  3. Held in the box and will begin serving their penalty time [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.2

7.2.3 True or False: The penalty clock only runs when the jam clock is running.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.3 The penalty clock starts when ...

  1. the skater is seated in the penalty box [Correct]
  2. the skater enters the penalty box
  3. the skater exits the track
  4. the skater is instructed to exit the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.3 True or False: If an illegal procedure gives one team an unfair advantage and the offending team fails to yield the advantage immediately, the referee may stop the jam.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.2.3.1 When there are ten (10) seconds remaining on the penalty clock, a skater will be ...

  1. instructed to stand and must stand [Correct]
  2. instructed to stand and may stand if they want to
  3. instructed to remain seated for ten more seconds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.3

7.2.3.1.1 If a skater does not stand when instructed when seated in the penalty box ...

  1. their penalty timer will stop until they stand [Correct]
  2. their penalty timer will continue
  3. they will be issued a Major penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.3

7.2.3.2 If a skater stands before there are 10 seconds remaining on their penalty clock when previously seated in the penalty box ...

  1. their penalty timer will continue
  2. their penalty timer will stop until they sit [Correct]
  3. they will be issued a Major penalty

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.3

7.2.4 True or False: Penalized skaters may leave the designated penalty box area during an official timeout.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.4 If no one skater can be singled out to receive a major penalty ...

  1. the penalty is not issued
  2. the penalty goes to the active Pivot [Correct]
  3. the penalty goes to the Captain
  4. the penalty goes to the skater nearest the referee

7.2.4 True or False: Penalized skaters may leave the designated penalty box area during a team timeout.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.4.1 Who may physically enter the designated penalty box area to communicate with a penalized skater?

  1. A penalized skater's teammates
  2. A penalized skater's manager
  3. A penalized skater's coach
  4. Neither a penalized skater's teammates, manager, or coach [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.4

7.2.5 True or False: A Team Captain is allowed to call for a Timeout whilst serving a penalty in the Penalty Box.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.5 True or False: If a Captain or Designated Alternate is penalised and in the penalty box they can not request a timeout.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.6 Which of these pieces of safety equipment may a penalised skater sat in the penalty box remove?

  1. None of these
  2. Their mouth guard [Correct]
  3. Their wrist guards and mouth guard
  4. Their helmet and mouth guard
  5. Their helmet
  6. Their wrist guards
  7. Their wrist guards and helmet

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.6 If a skater is in the penalty box but not sat down, they may remove:

  1. Their helmet for adjustment
  2. Their mouthguard
  3. No safety equipment [Correct]
  4. Their wrist guards

Note: A skater can only remove their mouth guard when sat down.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.7 True or False: After exiting the penalty box and on their way to re-entering the track a skater may skate clockwise, 15 feet (4.6 meters) away from the track (assume the clearance around the track is 10 feet (3 meters) wide).

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.7 In which of the following ways may a skater travel whilst out of bounds when returning to play from the penalty box?

  1. Clockwise
  2. Counter-clockwise
  3. Either clockwise or counter-clockwise [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.7 Where may a skater re-entering the track from the penalty box enter?

  1. behind the rearmost opposing pack skater
  2. behind the foremost pack skater
  3. behind the rearmost pack skater [Correct]
  4. behind the foremost opposing pack skater

Note: Rule 6.13.10 (which says entering in front of one pack skater who is a teammate is a "No Impact/No Penalty") seems to contradict this rule. It actually doesn't though, because you SHOULD enter behind the rearmost pack skater but if you enter in front of one teammate it's not a serious enough offence to warrant a Major penalty.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2

7.2.7.1 If a Jammer was sent to the penalty box after having completed their initial pass, and re-enters the track during the same jam ...

  1. they must re-complete their initial pass
  2. they may score immediately upon re-entering [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.7

7.2.7.2 If a Jammer is partially through a scoring pass when sent to the penalty box ...

  1. they retain all of the points scored [Correct]
  2. they lose all of the points scored

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.7

7.2.7.2 True or False: A Jammer is sent to the penalty box halfway through a scoring pass, and returns to the track in the same jam. The Jammer has the opportunity to complete the pass on the remaining unpassed skaters.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.7

7.2.7.3 True or False: A Jammer who has completed their initial pass and is returning from the penalty box will score on Out of play skaters behind them upon re-entering the track.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.7

7.2.7.3 True or False: if there is a No Pack situation, a player returning from the penalty box must enter the track behind all other skaters.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Note: Cutting the Track penalties do not apply when a skater is returning from the penalty box. During a No Pack there are no "in play" skaters to return behind. As a penalty is issued if a skater enters the track in front of "one or more pack skaters", no penalty is issued here.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.7

7.2.7.3 True or False: A skater may re-enter the track in front of opposing skaters who are out of play.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.7

7.2.7.3 True or False: When re-entering the track from the penalty box, a skater may re-enter in front of opposing skaters who are out of play.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.2.7

7.3 True or False: A Jammer will always serve 60 seconds in the penalty box for a Major penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3 If Jammer A has served 35 seconds in the penalty box when Jammer B sits in the penalty box after receiving a major penalty, how much time does Jammer B serve?

  1. 35 seconds [Correct]
  2. 60 seconds
  3. 25 seconds
  4. 10 seconds
  5. no time

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3 If a Jammer has served 40 seconds of their penalty when the opposing Jammer is given a Major penalty, when is the currently seated Jammer released?

  1. When the second Jammer is seated [Correct]
  2. When the second Jammer has served 20 seconds
  3. When the second Jammer has served 40 seconds
  4. After 20 more seconds
  5. Immediately
  6. When the second Jammer is no longer on the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.1 Red Jammer is sent back to the penalty box shortly after being released from the penalty box. Red Jammer had been previously released early due to Blue Jammer sitting down in the penalty box. Blue Jammer is still in the penalty box when Red Jammer arrives. What happens?

  1. The jam is whistled dead by an official
  2. Red Jammer is instructed to sit. Once they have sat, Blue Jammer is released
  3. Red Jammer is waived off
  4. There is no Jammer on track whilst both jammers serve their required penalty time [Correct]

Note: The rules covering both Jammers being penalised are worth reading multiple times. There are times, such as in this example, where you will have no Jammer on track.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.1 True or False: Substitutions are allowed if a penalty carries over to the next jam (excluding expulsion, fouling out and injury).

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.1 Jammer A is sent to the penalty box. Jammer B is then sent to the penalty box, releasing Jammer A. But oh no; Jammer A is sent back to the box before Jammer B is released. What happens?

  1. Both Jammers serve 10 seconds and are released
  2. Each Jammer serves their full, remaining time, and there is no Jammer on the track for a short time [Correct]
  3. Jammer A serves the same amount of time as Jammer B, Jammer B is immediately released
  4. Both Jammers are released immediately

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.1.1 Two Jammers are in the penalty box: Jammer A was serving a penalty when Jammer B was sent to the box. Upon returning to the track, Jammer A gets another penalty and is being sent back to the penalty box when the jam clock expires. What happens?

  1. Both Jammers are held in the penalty box for 10 seconds then released
  2. Both Jammers start in the penalty box and stay for their required penalty time [Correct]
  3. No Jammer starts in the Penalty box
  4. Only the Jammer who entered the penalty box second must start the next jam in the penalty box
  5. Only the Jammer who entered the penalty box first must start the next jam in the penalty box

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3.1

7.3.1.1 True or False: If a skater Fouls Out at the start of a jam they are permitted to return to play once they have served one minute in the penalty box.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.1.1 If a penalised skater has fouled out, when must they be substituted (assuming they are in the penalty box)?

  1. Between periods
  2. Between jams [Correct]
  3. Immediately
  4. Never

7.3.1.1 Under what situation must a penalised skater be substituted?

  1. If the penalised skater is tired
  2. If the penalised skater is the Jammer
  3. If the penalised skater has an expulsion [Correct]
  4. If the penalised skater has been injured [Correct]
  5. If the penalised skater has fouled out [Correct]
  6. If the penalised skater has received a misconduct penalty
  7. If the penalised skater is a Pivot

7.3.2 True or False: There is no required minimum time for jammers to serve in the penalty box (other than when both jammers sit down in the penalty box at exactly the same time).

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Note: The reason there's no required minimum time is that if a jammer is sat in the penalty box and the other jammer comes and sits in the penalty box, the first jammer is released.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.2 What happens if both Jammers sit down in the penalty box at the same time?

  1. Both are immediately released
  2. Both serve 60 seconds
  3. Both serve 30 seconds
  4. Both serve 20 seconds
  5. Both serve 10 seconds [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.2 When sent to the penalty box, when must a skater exit the track?

  1. Once the Jam is over
  2. Within 20 seconds
  3. Immediately [Correct]
  4. Whenever they want

7.3.2 True or False: a skater may skate either clockwise or counter-clockwise to the penalty box.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.2.1 True or False: Penalty timing begins when the skater exits the track.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.2.2 If the penalty box is full at the end of a jam and a skater receives a major penalty, when do they serve their penalty?

  1. In the next jam they skate in, which doesn't have to be the next jam
  2. In the next jam [Correct]
  3. Never

7.3.2.2 True or False: A team may have three blockers seated in the penalty box at one time.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.2.2.1 When does a skater's penalty timing begin if they are sent for a major penalty during a jam and the jam is not called off?

  1. When the skater enters the penalty box area
  2. When the skater leaves the track and becomes out of bounds
  3. When the penalty is called by the referee
  4. When the skater is seated in the penalty box [Correct]

7.3.2.2.1 The moment a penalized skater is directed off the track they...

  1. Are considered "in the box" but their penalty time does not begin until they are seated in the penalty box [Correct]
  2. Are considered "in the box" and their penalty time begins immediately
  3. Are not considered "in the box" and their penalty time does not begin, until they are seated in the penalty box

7.3.2.2.2 If there is only one Blocker from a given team on the track, they get a Major penalty and the penalty box has space for them, they ...

  1. Are instructed to exit the track
  2. Are instructed to stay on the track [Correct]

7.3.2.2.2.1 If there is only one Blocker from a given team on the track, they get a Major penalty and the penalty box has space for them, they will be sent to the box...

  1. As soon as there are four (4) Blockers from the team on the track
  2. Immediately
  3. As soon as another Blocker from their team joins the Pack [Correct]
  4. As soon as another Blocker from their team is on the track

7.3.2.3 If there are two Blockers in the penalty box and one has less than 10 seconds of penalty time remaining, a third penalized Blocker will be...

  1. Waved off
  2. Held in the box and will begin serving their penalty time [Correct]
  3. Held in the box but will not begin serving their penalty time until there is only one Blocker in the box

7.3.2.3 True or False: A Jammer can never be waved off from the penalty box.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.3.2.3 If there are two Blockers, A and B, in the penalty box (neither with less than 10 seconds of penalty time remaining) and Blocker C from the same team is penalized, Blocker C will be...

  1. Instructed to stand and wait
  2. Told to sit in the available seat
  3. Waved off [Correct]

7.3.3 A jam ends with Jammer A in the penalty box and Jammer B on their way to the penalty box. What happens?

  1. Both jammers start in the penalty box, Jammer A is allowed to re-enter play on the jam-starting whistle of the new jam [Correct]
  2. Both jammers start in the penalty box, Jammer B is allowed to re-enter play on the jam-starting whistle of the new jam
  3. Only Jammer B starts in the penalty box and must serve their full penalty time
  4. Only Jammer B starts in the penalty box and must serve 10 seconds
  5. Only Jammer A starts in the penalty box and must serve their full penalty time

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.3 True or False: The penalty clock only runs when the jam clock is running.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.3.3 The penalty clock starts when ...

  1. the skater is seated in the penalty box [Correct]
  2. the skater enters the penalty box
  3. the skater exits the track
  4. the skater is instructed to exit the track

7.3.3.1 A jam ends with Jammer A in the penalty box and Jammer B on their way to the penalty box. Which jammer can be substituted?

  1. Both
  2. Neither [Correct]
  3. Jammer A
  4. Jammer B

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3.3

7.3.3.1 When there are ten (10) seconds remaining on the penalty clock, a skater will be ...

  1. instructed to stand and must stand [Correct]
  2. instructed to stand and may stand if they want to
  3. instructed to remain seated for ten more seconds

7.3.4 A penalized Jammer has less than ten seconds remaining on their penalty time and they leave the penalty box without being told to by an official. They will ...

  1. be given a Major penalty
  2. have to return to the penalty box and serve the remaining time, and be given a Major penalty [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.4 True or False: Penalized skaters may leave the designated penalty box area during an official timeout.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.4 True or False: Penalized skaters may leave the designated penalty box area during a team timeout.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.4.1 Who may physically enter the designated penalty box area to communicate with a penalized skater?

  1. A penalized skater’s coach
  2. A penalized skater’s manager
  3. A penalized skater’s teammates
  4. Neither a penalized skater’s teammates, manager, or coach [Correct]

7.3.5 One team forgets to field a jammer. During the jam the one jammer on track is sent to the penalty box. What happens?

  1. The jam is immediately whistled dead by a referee
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee when the Jammer takes a seat in the penalty box [Correct]
  3. The jam continues and the Jammer serves 10 seconds in the penalty box
  4. The jam continues and the Jammer serves 60 seconds in the penalty box

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.5 True or False: A jam will be whistled dead if only one team fields a Jammer and they are sent to the penalty box and take a seat.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.5 True or False: A Team Captain is allowed to call for a Timeout whilst serving a penalty in the Penalty Box.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.5 True or False: If a Captain or Designated Alternate is penalised and in the penalty box they can not request a timeout.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.3.5.1 A jam is whistled dead because there was only one jammer on track and they were sent to the penalty box. Who can be substituted before the next jam?

  1. Any skater
  2. Any skater from the team who fielded a jammer
  3. Any skater other than the penalised jammer [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3.5

7.3.6 Which of the following are permitted whilst a skater is seated in the penalty box:

  1. Removing a mouthguard [Correct]
  2. Removing wrist guards
  3. Calling a team timeout
  4. Removing a mouthguard and calling a team timeout
  5. Removing a mouthguard and wrist guards

7.3.6 If there is only one jammer on track because the other team did not field a jammer, and the jammer on track removes themselves due to an equipment failure, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track [Correct]
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.6 If there is only one jammer on track because the other jammer is in the penalty box, and the jammer on track removes themselves due to an equipment failure, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track [Correct]
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.6 If a skater is in the penalty box but not sat down, they may remove:

  1. Their helmet for adjustment
  2. Their mouthguard
  3. No safety equipment [Correct]
  4. Their wrist guards

7.3.6 Which of these pieces of safety equipment may a penalised skater sat in the penalty box remove?

  1. None of these
  2. Their mouth guard [Correct]
  3. Their wrist guards and mouth guard
  4. Their helmet and mouth guard
  5. Their helmet
  6. Their wrist guards
  7. Their wrist guards and helmet

7.3.7 True or False: After exiting the penalty box a skater may skate clockwise, 15 feet away from the track (assume the ref lane is 10 feet wide).

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

7.3.7 If there is only one jammer on track because the other jammer is in the penalty box, and the jammer on track removes themselves due to injury and won't be rejoining the current jam, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.7 Where may a skater re-entering the track from the penalty box enter?

  1. behind the rearmost pack skater [Correct]
  2. behind the formost pack skater
  3. behind the rearmost opposing pack skater
  4. behind the formost opposing pack skater

7.3.7 In which of the following ways may a skater travel whilst out of bounds when returning to play from the penalty box?

  1. Clockwise
  2. Counter-clockwise
  3. Either clockwise or counter-clockwise [Correct]

7.3.7.1 If a jammer removing themselves from a jam due to injury causes the jam to be whistled dead by a referee, the jammer ...

  1. must now sit on the bench for three jams or the remainder of the period [Correct]
  2. must now sit on the bench for five jams or the remainder of the period
  3. can join the next jam
  4. must now sit on the bench for the rest of the game
  5. must now sit on the bench for the remainder of the period

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3.7

7.3.7.1 If a Jammer was pulled from a jam after having completed their initial pass, and re-enters during the same jam ...

  1. they must re-complete their initial pass
  2. they may score immediately upon re-entering [Correct]

7.3.7.2 If a Jammer is partially through a scoring pass when sent to the penalty box ...

  1. they retain all of the points scored [Correct]
  2. they lose all of the points scored

7.3.7.2 True or False: If a Jammer is sent to the penalty box halfway through a scoring pass, if they return to the track in the same jam they have the opportunity to complete the pass on the remaining unpassed skaters.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.3.7.3 True or False: A skater may re-enter the track in front of opposing skaters who are out of play.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.3.7.3 True or False: if there is a No Pack situation, a player returning from the penalty box must enter the track behind all other skaters.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Note: The skater is returning from the penalty box so isn't cutting anyone

7.3.7.3 True or False: When re-entering the track from the penalty box, a skater may re-enter in front of opposing skaters who are out of play.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.3.7.3 True or False: A Jammer who has completed their initial pass and is returning from the penalty box will score on Out of play skaters behind them upon re-entering the track.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.3.7.4 True or False: If a Jammer is in the penalty box at the start of a jam but leaves before the Jammer starting whistle blows, they may enter the track in front of the opposing Jammer.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.3.8 If Jammer A is in the penalty box and Jammer B chooses to quit playing, what happens?

  1. Jammer A is released immediately
  2. The jam is called off and Jammer B is no longer permitted to play in this bout [Correct]
  3. The jam continues with no jammer on track
  4. The jam is called off and Jammer B can re-join the game in the next jam

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.9 If Jammer A fouls out and Jammer B is sent to the penalty box in the same jam, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track
  2. The jam is immediately whistled dead by a referee when Jammer B is seated in the box [Correct]
  3. Jammer B is released after serving 10 seconds
  4. The jam is immediately whistled dead by a referee when Jammer B has left the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.9.1 Jammer A fouls out and Jammer B is sent to the penalty box in the same jam, the jam is whistled dead by a referee. Who may be substituted in the new jam?

  1. Any skaters not owing penalty time [Correct]
  2. Any skaters

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3.9

7.3.10 Jammer A has been sent to serve two minutes in the penalty box. Jammer B is sent to the penalty box when Jammer A has sat for 15 seconds (so at this point has 1 minute and 45 seconds remaining). What happens to Jammer A's penalty time when Jammer B sits?

  1. It is reduced to 45 seconds [Correct]
  2. It is reduced to 0 and Jammer A is released
  3. Nothing
  4. It is reduced to 1 minute

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.10 Jammer A has been sent to serve two minutes in the penalty box as a result of two major penalties being issued. Jammer B is sent to the penalty box when Jammer A has 1 minute and 45 seconds remaining (so has served 15 seconds). How long does Jammer B stay in the penalty box?

  1. No time (0 seconds) [Correct]
  2. 10 seconds
  3. 2 minutes
  4. 15 seconds
  5. 1 minute
  6. 1 minute and 45 seconds
  7. 45 seconds
  8. 1 minute and 15 seconds

Note: When a Jammer is serving multiple penalties they are always treated as individual penalties one after the other, not combined into one big one. In this case Jammer B arrives, releasing Jammer A from their FIRST penalty. But, Jammer A now has to sit their SECOND penalty, thus releasing Jammer B immediately back onto the track.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3

7.3.10 Jammer 231 gets sent to the penalty box for two(2) minutes. Jammer 546 enters the penalty box and sit with Jammer 231 having one minute thirty seconds(1:30) left to serve. What will happen to the Jam and/or Jammer(s)?

  1. Jammer 231 penalty time will be reduced by one(1) minute, then Jammer 546 will leave the penalty box.
  2. Jammer 231 will be release and Jammer 546 will have to serve one(1) minute thirty(30) seconds.
  3. Jammer 231 penalty time will be reduced by one(1) minute and Jammer 546 will serve thirty(30) seconds.
  4. Jammer 546 will be released back into play by the penalty box official while Jammer 231 penalty time will be reduced by one(1) minute. [Correct]
  5. Jam is whistled dead and a new Jam is started with Jammer 546 standing in the penalty box.
  6. Jam is whistled dead and Jammer 546 gets sent to her bench before the start of the next Jam.

7.3.10.1 Jammer A has been sent to the penalty box to serve 2 minutes. Jammer A has served 1 minute and 45 seconds when Jammer B arrives at the penalty box and sits. What happens?

  1. Jammer A is released and Jammer B must sit for 1 minute 45 seconds
  2. Jammer A is released and Jammer B must sit for 45 seconds [Correct]
  3. Jammer B is released and Jammer A must sit for a further 15 seconds
  4. Both Jammers must sit for 10 seconds

Note: Whilst the rules say each jammer should serve the same amount of time, that's on a per-penalty basis. So the 1 min 45 seconds is two penalties, only one is used in the calculation of time to sit.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.3.10

7.4 If Jammer A has served 35 seconds in the penalty box when Jammer B sits in the penalty box after receiving a major penalty, how much time does Jammer B serve?

  1. 35 seconds [Correct]
  2. 60 seconds
  3. 25 seconds
  4. 10 seconds
  5. no time

7.4 If a Jammer has served 40 seconds of their penalty when the opposing Jammer is given a Major penalty, when is the currently seated Jammer released?

  1. When the second Jammer is seated [Correct]
  2. When the second Jammer has served 20 seconds
  3. When the second Jammer has served 40 seconds
  4. After 20 more seconds
  5. Immediately
  6. When the second Jammer is no longer on the track

7.4 True or False: A Jammer will always serve 60 seconds in the penalty box for a Major penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.4.1 Jammer A is sent to the penalty box. Jammer B is then sent to the penalty box, releasing Jammer A. But oh no; Jammer A is sent back to the box before Jammer B is released. What happens?

  1. Jammer A serves the same amount of time as Jammer B, Jammer B is imediatly released
  2. Each Jammer serves their full, remaining time, and there is no Jammer on the track for a short time [Correct]
  3. Both Jammers serve 10 seconds and are released
  4. Both Jammers are released immediately

7.4.1 Red Jammer is sent back to the penalty box shortly after being released from the penalty box. Red Jammer had been released early due to Blue Jammer sitting down in the penalty box. Blue Jammer is still in the penalty box when Red Jammer arrives. What happens?

  1. The jam is whistled dead by an official
  2. Red Jammer is waved off
  3. There is no Jammer on track whilst both jammers serve their full penalty time [Correct]
  4. Red Jammer is instructed to sit. Once they have sat, Blue Jammer is released

Note: The rules covering both Jammers being penalised are worth reading multiple times. There are times, such as in this example, where you will have no Jammer on track.

7.4.1.1 Two Jammers are in the penalty box: Jammer A was serving a penalty when Jammer B was sent to the box. Upon returning to the track, Jammer A gets another penalty and is being sent back to the penalty box when the jam clock expires. What happens?

  1. Both Jammers are held in the penalty box for 10 seconds then released
  2. Both Jammers start in the penalty box and stay for their required penalty time [Correct]
  3. No Jammer starts in the Penalty box
  4. Only the Jammer who entered the penalty box second must start the next jam in the penalty box
  5. Only the Jammer who entered the penalty box first must start the next jam in the penalty box

7.4.1.1 True or False: Some Major offences a skater earns do not count towards that skater Fouling Out (excluding penalties given to bench staff).

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Note: Sometimes a skater can be told to serve one minute for another skater's penalty. The skater serving the time did not earn a Major, they just have to serve one.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.1.1.1 A skater fouls out from the game for ...

  1. 7 penalty turns in the penalty box [Correct]
  2. 8 penalty turns in the penalty box
  3. 9 penalty turns in the penalty box
  4. 6 penalty turns in the penalty box

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.1.1.1 How many Major Penalties will cause a player to foul out of the game?

  1. 3
  2. 4
  3. 5
  4. 6
  5. 7 [Correct]
  6. 9
  7. 8

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.1.2 A skater receives a 7th Major penalty and Fouls Out. Who serves their penalty time once the current jam is over?

  1. They do, before leaving the track
  2. Nobody, the Fouled Out skater must leave the track immediately
  3. Another skater, the Fouled Out skater must leave the track immediately [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.1.2 True or False: In order to prevent their team skating short, a Fouled Out skater can be substituted during the jam they got their final penalty in.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.1.2 A Jammer Fouls Out of a game during a jam, who will serve their minute?

  1. Only another skater who is serving as a Jammer or Pivot
  2. Only another skater who is serving as a Jammer [Correct]
  3. Any other skater
  4. Only another skater who is serving as a Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.1.2 A Pivot Fouls Out of a game during a jam, who will serve their minute?

  1. Only another skater who will serve as a Pivot [Correct]
  2. Any other skater
  3. Only another skater who will serve as a Jammer or Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.1.2.1 If a skater who has fouled out interferes with game play...

  1. their team will be penalised [Correct]
  2. their team will not be penalised
  3. they may no longer be permitted to remain on the floor and must return to the locker room or staging area. [Correct]
  4. they are still permitted to remain on the floor

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.1

7.4.2 True or False: There is no required minimum time for jammers to serve in the penalty box (other than when both jammers sit down in the penalty box at exactly the same time).

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

7.4.2 What happens if both Jammers sit down in the penalty box at the same time?

  1. Both are immediately released
  2. Both serve 60 seconds
  3. Both serve 30 seconds
  4. Both serve 20 seconds
  5. Both serve 10 seconds [Correct]

7.4.2.1 True or False: The Head Referee's decision is binding.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.1 Who decides if a skater is to be expelled for serious physical violence?

  1. Only the Head Referee [Correct]
  2. Any Referee
  3. Any Official
  4. Any Official or Captain

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.2 True or False: an incident may be deemed so severe the skater in question is suspended for their next game..

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.3 True or False: Any intentional contact with a referee is grounds for suspension.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.3 Insubordination can be grounds for ...

  1. Expulsion and suspension
  2. Only expulsion [Correct]
  3. Only suspension

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.4 Who may downgrade an expulsion?

  1. Any referee
  2. The Head Referee
  3. Nobody [Correct]
  4. Any Official or Captain

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.5 During a tournament, if a skater is expelled when is the soonest they can next play?

  1. The following period
  2. The following game [Correct]
  3. The following tournament
  4. The following jam

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.6 True or False: Coaches and managers can be expelled.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.2.6 If a Coach or Manager is expelled, who serves their penalty minute?

  1. The Captain [Correct]
  2. Any team skater
  3. They do
  4. The nearest Pivot

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.2

7.4.3 The Head Referee must meet with who, before recommending a suspension of a skater?

  1. Captains [Correct]
  2. Nobody
  3. Coaches
  4. All Skaters
  5. Other referees

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4

7.4.3 A jam ends with Jammer A in the penalty box and Jammer B on their way to the penalty box. What happens?

  1. Both jammers start in the penalty box, Jammer A is allowed to re-enter play on the second whistle of the new jam [Correct]
  2. Both jammers start in the penalty box, Jammer B is allowed to re-enter play on the second whistle of the new jam
  3. Only Jammer B starts in the penalty box and must serve their full penalty time
  4. Only Jammer B starts in the penalty box and must serve 10 seconds
  5. Only Jammer A starts in the penalty box and must serve their full penalty time

7.4.3 The Head Referee must meet with who, before expelling a skater?

  1. Nobody [Correct]
  2. The Captain
  3. The Coach
  4. Both Captains

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4

7.4.3.1 A jam ends with Jammer A in the penalty box and Jammer B on their way to the penalty box. Which jammer can be substituted?

  1. Both
  2. Neither [Correct]
  3. Jammer A
  4. Jammer B

7.4.4 When a skater has been Expelled, where must they go?

  1. The team's bench
  2. The locker room or staging area [Correct]
  3. The penalty box

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4

7.4.4 A penalized Jammer has less than ten seconds remaining on their penalty time and they leave the penalty box. They will ...

  1. have to return to the penalty box and serve the remaining time, and be given a Major penalty [Correct]
  2. be given a Major penalty
  3. have to return to the penalty box and serve the remaining time, and be given a Minor penalty
  4. be given a Minor penalty

7.4.5 One team forgets to field a jammer. During the jam the one jammer on track is sent to the penalty box. What happens?

  1. The jam is immediately whistled dead by a referee
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee when the Jammer takes a seat in the penalty box [Correct]
  3. The jam continues and the Jammer serves 10 seconds in the penalty box
  4. The jam continues and the Jammer serves 60 seconds in the penalty box

7.4.5 True or False: A jam will be whistled dead if only one team fields a jammer and they are sent to the penalty box and take a seat.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.4.5 A Fouled Out skater's 7th penalty timer begins when...

  1. A referee has made sure the Fouled Out skater left the track and the ref has instructed the penalty box official to begin timing [Correct]
  2. The Fouled Out skater is sat in the penalty box (if it is not known at this time they're on their 7th penalty) [Correct]
  3. The Fouled Out skater has left the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4

7.4.5 A skater has Fouled Out and spent 20 seconds in the penalty box before the jam ends. How long must their substitute sit in the penalty box?

  1. 60 seconds
  2. 10 seconds
  3. 20 seconds
  4. 40 seconds [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4

7.4.5.1 A jam is whistled dead because there was only one jammer on track and they were sent to the penalty box. Who can be substituted before the next jam?

  1. Any skater
  2. Any skater from the team who fielded a jammer
  3. Any skater other than the penalised jammer [Correct]

7.4.5.2 A skater is sent to the box and it is only realised after 35 seconds of them seating, when the jam is called off, this is their 7th trip to the box and they have Fouled Out. How long does their substitute have to sit in the penalty box?

  1. 10 seconds
  2. no time
  3. 25 seconds [Correct]
  4. 35 seconds
  5. 60 seconds

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/7.4.5

7.4.6 If there is only one jammer on track because the other jammer is in the penalty box, and the jammer on track removes themselves due to an equipment failure, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track [Correct]
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee

7.4.6 If there is only one jammer on track because the other team did not field a jammer, and the jammer on track removes themselves due to an equipment failure, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track [Correct]
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee

7.4.7 If there is only one jammer on track because the other jammer is in the penalty box, and the jammer on track removes themselves due to injury and won't be rejoining the current jam, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track
  2. The jam is whistled dead by a referee [Correct]

7.4.7.1 If a jammer removing themselves from a jam due to injury causes the jam to be whistled dead by a referee, the jammer ...

  1. must now sit on the bench for three jams or the remainder of the period [Correct]
  2. must now sit on the bench for five jams or the remainder of the period
  3. can join the next jam
  4. must now sit on the bench for the rest of the game
  5. must now sit on the bench for the remainder of the period

7.4.8 If Jammer A is in the penalty box and Jammer B chooses to quit playing, what happens?

  1. Jammer A is released immediately
  2. The jam is called off and Jammer B is no longer permitted to play in this bout [Correct]
  3. The jam continues with no jammer on track
  4. The jam is called off and Jammer B can re-join the game in the next jam

7.4.9 If Jammer A fouls out and Jammer B is sent to the penalty box in the same jam, what happens?

  1. The jam continues with no jammer on track
  2. The jam is immediately whistled dead by a referee when Jammer B is seated in the box [Correct]
  3. Jammer B is released after serving 10 seconds
  4. The jam is immediately whistled dead by a referee when Jammer B has left the track

7.4.9.1 Jammer A fouls out and Jammer B is sent to the penalty box in the same jam, the jam is whistled dead by a referee. Who may be substituted in the new jam?

  1. Any skaters not owing penalty time [Correct]
  2. Any skaters

7.4.10 Jammer A has been sent to serve two minutes in the penalty box as a result of two major penalties being issued. Jammer B is sent to the penalty box when Jammer A has 1 minute and 45 seconds remaining (so has served 15 seconds). How long does Jammer B stay in the penalty box?

  1. No time (0 seconds) [Correct]
  2. 10 seconds
  3. 2 minutes
  4. 15 seconds
  5. 1 minute
  6. 1 minute and 45 seconds
  7. 45 seconds
  8. 1 minute and 15 seconds

Note: Because Jammer A is serving more than one minute, you can think of this as B arriving, A leaving them immediately returning. This results in B leaving immediately and A's time remaining being reduced by 1 minute.

7.4.10 Jammer A has been sent to serve two minutes in the penalty box. Jammer B is sent to the penalty box when Jammer A has 1 minute and 45 seconds remaining. What happens to Jammer A's penalty time?

  1. It is reduced to 45 seconds [Correct]
  2. It is reduced to 0 and Jammer A is released
  3. Nothing
  4. It is reduced to 1 minute

7.4.10.1 Jammer A has been sent to the penalty box to serve 2 minutes. Jammer A has served 1 minute and 45 seconds when Jammer B arrives at the penalty box and sits. What happens?

  1. Jammer A is released and Jammer B must sit for 1 minute 45 seconds
  2. Jammer A is released and Jammer B must sit for 45 seconds [Correct]
  3. Jammer B is released and Jammer A must sit for a further 15 seconds
  4. Both Jammers must sit for 10 seconds

Note: Whilst the rules say each jammer should serve the same amount of time, that's on a per-penalty basis. So the 1 min 45 seconds is two penalties, only one is used in the calculation of time to sit.

7.5.1.1 True or False: Minor offences do not count towards a skater Fouling Out.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.5.1.1 True or False: Some Major offences a skater earns do not count towards that skater Fouling Out (excluding penalties given to bench staff).

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Note: Sometimes a skater can be told to serve one minute for another skater's penalty. The skater serving the time did not earn a Major, they just have to serve one.

7.5.1.1.1 How many Major Penalties (assume no other penalties) will cause a player to foul out of the game?

  1. 3
  2. 4
  3. 5
  4. 6
  5. 7 [Correct]
  6. 9

7.5.1.1.1 A skater fouls out from the game for ...

  1. 7 minutes in the penalty box
  2. 7 Major Penalties
  3. 7 penalty turns in the penalty box [Correct]
  4. 7 Minor Penalties
  5. 7 Major or Minor Penalties
  6. 8 minutes in the penalty box
  7. 8 penalty turns in the penalty box
  8. 6 minutes in the penalty box

7.5.1.2 True or False: A Fouled Out skater can be substituted in the jam they Foul Out in to prevent their team skating short.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

7.5.1.2 A Jammer Fouls Out of a game during a jam, who will serve their minute?

  1. Only another skater who is serving as a Jammer or Pivot
  2. Only another skater who is serving as a Jammer [Correct]
  3. Any other skater
  4. Only another skater who is serving as a Pivot

7.5.1.2 A Pivot Fouls Out of a game during a jam, who will serve their minute?

  1. Any other skater
  2. Only another skater who is a Pivot [Correct]
  3. Only another skater who is a Jammer or Pivot

7.5.1.2 A skater receives a 7th Major penalty and Fouls Out. Who serves their penalty time once the current jam is over?

  1. They do, before leaving the track
  2. Nobody, the Fouled Out skater must leave the track immediately
  3. Another skater, the Fouled Out skater must leave the track immediately [Correct]

7.5.2.1 True or False: The Head Referee's decision is binding.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.5.2.1 Who decides if a skater is to be expelled for serious physical violence?

  1. Only the Head Referee [Correct]
  2. Any Referee
  3. Any Official
  4. Any Official or Captain

7.5.2.2 True or False: an incident may be deemed so extreme the skater in question is suspended for multiple games.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.5.2.3 True or False: Any intentional contact with a referee is grounds for suspension.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.5.2.3 Insubordination can be grounds for ...

  1. Expulsion and suspension
  2. Only expulsion [Correct]
  3. Only suspension

7.5.2.4 Who may downgrade an expulsion?

  1. Any referee
  2. The Head Referee
  3. Nobody [Correct]
  4. Any Official or Captain

Note: If a ref is unsure if a Major Penalty or an Expulsion should be issued, they should go for the Major Penalty. However, once an Expulsion has been given, it can not be undone.

7.5.2.5 During a tournament, if a skater is expelled when is the soonest they can next play?

  1. The following period
  2. The following game [Correct]
  3. The following tournament
  4. The following jam

7.5.2.6 True or False: Coaches and managers can be expelled.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

7.5.3 The Head Referee must meet with who, before expelling a skater?

  1. Nobody [Correct]
  2. The Captain
  3. The Coach
  4. Both Captains

7.5.3 The Head Referee must meet with who, before recommending a suspension of a skater?

  1. Captains [Correct]
  2. Nobody
  3. Coaches
  4. All Skaters
  5. Other referees

7.5.4 When a skater has Fouled Out, where must they go?

  1. The team's bench
  2. The locker room or staging area [Correct]
  3. The penalty box

7.5.5 A skater has Fouled Out and spent 20 seconds in the penalty box before the jam ends. How long must their substitute sit in the penalty box?

  1. 60 seconds
  2. 10 seconds
  3. 20 seconds
  4. 40 seconds [Correct]

7.5.5.1 A Fouled Out skater's 7th penalty timer begins when...

  1. The Fouled Out skater is sat in the penalty box (if it is not known at this time they're on their 7th penalty) [Correct]
  2. A referee has made sure the Fouled Out skater is in the locker room or staging area and has instructed the penalty box official to begin timing [Correct]
  3. The Fouled Out skater's substitute is sat in the penalty box

7.5.5.2 A skater is sent to the box and it is only realised after 35 seconds of them seating, when the jam is called off, this is their 7th trip to the box and they have Fouled Out. How long does their substitute have to sit in the penalty box?

  1. 10 seconds
  2. no time
  3. 25 seconds [Correct]
  4. 35 seconds
  5. 60 seconds

8.1 Who is eligible to accrue points?

  1. Only skaters wearing the designated Pivot's stripe helmet with visible stripe
  2. Only skaters wearing the designated Jammer's star helmet with visible stars [Correct]
  3. Any skater
  4. Only skaters wearing the designated Jammer's star helmet, regardless of star visibility

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.1

8.2 True or False: Jammers can score on their first pass through the pack. Assume this is not an overtime jam.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

8.2 True or False: Jammers can score points on opposing Blockers on their first pass through the pack. Assume this is not an overtime jam.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.2

8.2.1 True or False: Jammers can score Jammer lap points on their initial pass.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.2

8.3 How do Jammers score points (assuming this is not an overtime jam)?

  1. Passing skaters whilst the Jammer is on their second and each subsequent pass through the pack [Correct]
  2. Passing skaters whilst the Jammer is on their first and each subsequent pass through the pack
  3. Passing skaters whilst the Jammer is on their third and each subsequent pass through the pack

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3

8.3 How many points can a Jammer score on a Blocker per scoring pass (assuming no ghost points)?

  1. 1 [Correct]
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. There is no limit

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3

8.3.1 True or False: A Jammer can receive a point on a blocker they illegally pass.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3

8.3.1 A Jammer scores by passing an opponent's...

  1. head
  2. foremost body or equipment part
  3. rearmost body or equipment part
  4. hips [Correct]
  5. wheels
  6. skates

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3

8.3.1 Team A's Jammer is on a scoring pass and passes 2 of team B's Blockers legally and 1 illegally. The 4th Blocker is in the penalty box. How many points are scored?

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3 [Correct]
  4. 4
  5. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3

8.3.1.1 If a Jammer commits an illegal action during a pass and so does not get a point, what can they do?

  1. Nothing until their next pass through the pack.
  2. Attempt to re-pass and score, as long as they have not left the engagement zone. [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.2 For a Jammer to earn points whilst airborne (assuming they left the ground in bounds) they must...

  1. land in bounds and with upright status at the moment of landing, regardless of whether they stay upright and skating [Correct]
  2. land in bounds and continue upright and skating
  3. land out of bounds but with upright status at the moment of landing

Note: This was clarified in a WFTDA Question and Answer post on January 17, 2013 titled "Passing while airborne". As long as the first part of the Jammer to touch the ground is in bounds, they get the points.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.2 When is a Jammer's scoring pass finished?

  1. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 20 feet [Correct]
  2. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater
  3. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 10 feet
  4. When they begin to re-enter the pack for the next pass

8.3.1.2 When is a Jammer's scoring pass completed?

  1. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 10 feet during the previous pass
  2. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater during the previous pass
  3. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 20 feet during the previous pass [Correct]
  4. When they reach 20 feet behind the pack

8.3.1.2.1 A blocker is scored on, and chases a Jammer out of the Engagement Zone. The Blocker is passed for a second time whilst 25 feet from the front of the pack. How many points has the Jammer scored on that Blocker in total?

  1. Two, during the first "pass"
  2. One during the first "pass" and one during the second "pass"
  3. One during the first "pass" [Correct]
  4. No points

8.3.1.2.1.1 A Blocker has chased a Jammer and is out of the Engagement Zone, when are they eligible to be scored on again?

  1. When the Jammer begins their next pass, regardless of Blocker position
  2. Immediately
  3. When the Blocker has returned to the Engagement Zone [Correct]

8.3.1.3 A Jammer is down but in bounds. An opposing Blocker skates clockwise past them. The Jammer ...

  1. has not passed them yet
  2. has now passed them [Correct]
  3. is now unable to pass them

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.4 When is a Jammer's scoring pass completed?

  1. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 20 feet (6 meters) during the previous pass [Correct]
  2. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater during the previous pass
  3. When they reach 20 feet (6 meters) behind the pack
  4. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 10 feet (3 meters) during the previous pass

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.4 When is a Jammer's scoring pass finished?

  1. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater
  2. When they begin to re-enter the pack for the next pass
  3. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 20 feet (6 meters) [Correct]
  4. When they have cleared the foremost pack skater by 10 feet (3 meters)

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.4.1 A blocker is scored on, and chases a Jammer out of the Engagement Zone. The Blocker is passed for a second time whilst 25 feet (7.6 meters) from the front of the pack. How many points has the Jammer scored on that Blocker in total?

  1. Two, during the first "pass"
  2. One during the first "pass" and one during the second "pass"
  3. One during the first "pass" [Correct]
  4. No points

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.4.1.1 A Blocker has chased a Jammer and is out of the Engagement Zone, when are they eligible to be scored on in the normal manner (hips passing) again?

  1. When the Jammer begins their next pass, regardless of Blocker position
  2. Immediately
  3. When the Blocker has returned to the Engagement Zone [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.4.1.2 The circumstance where a Jammer can score on an opposing Blocker who is ahead of the engagement zone without passing them is...

  1. The jammer is on a scoring pass and has passed the foremost opposing blocker but not the foremost blocker
  2. The jammer is on a scoring pass and has passed the foremost opposing blocker
  3. The jammer is on a scoring pass, has already scored on one opposing blocker and has passed the foremost in play blocker [Correct]
  4. The jammer is on a scoring pass and has already scored on one opposing blocker

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.1.4.1.2 True or False: There are circumstances where a Jammer can score on an opposing Blocker who is ahead of the engagement zone without passing them.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.3.1

8.3.2 A Jammer scores by passing an opposing Blocker's...

  1. head
  2. foremost body or equipment part
  3. rearmost body or equipment part
  4. hips [Correct]
  5. wheels
  6. skates

8.4 True or False: If a jammer passes the pack then leaves the engagement zone, and is then swallowed up by the pack, they return to their previous pass (however is unable to score on blockers previously not scored on).

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.4

8.4 True or False: A jammer can initiate their initial pass through the pack by entering the pack from the front.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

8.4.1 If a jammer is lapped by the pack before their initial pass, how many times must they pass through the pack to be on a scoring pass?

  1. Once
  2. Twice [Correct]
  3. They are already on their scoring pass
  4. Three times

8.4.2 If a jammer is lapped by the pack before their initial pass, how many times must the jammer now pass through the pack to be on their first scoring pass?

  1. Once
  2. Twice [Correct]
  3. They are already on their scoring pass
  4. Three times

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.4

8.5 Team A has one Blocker in the penalty box. Team B's Jammer is on their scoring pass and has yet to score, then laps (scores on) Team A's Jammer who is at the back of the pack and has yet to complete their initial pass. How many points does Team B's Jammer get?

  1. One [Correct]
  2. Two
  3. Three
  4. None

Note: A Jammer only gets the ghost points for players in the penalty box when they score on Blockers.

8.5 True or False: A Jammer only gets the ghost points for opposing players in the penalty box when they score on blockers, as oppose to when they score on either blockers or the opposing Jammer.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

8.5 When does a Jammer score a point on opposing skaters not on the track?

  1. Once they enter the pack
  2. Once they have completed their pass
  3. On their first point scored on an opposing blocker [Correct]
  4. Never
  5. Once they enter the engagement zone

8.5.1 True or False: A Jammer can score on a Blocker who is out of bounds

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.1 If Blue team has two blockers in the penalty box and Red jammer scores on a Blue blocker, how many points is the jammer awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3 [Correct]
  4. 4
  5. 5

8.5.1.1 When does a Jammer score a point on opposing skaters not on the track?

  1. Once they enter the pack
  2. Once they have completed their pass
  3. On their first point scored on an opposing blocker [Correct]
  4. Never
  5. Once they enter the engagement zone

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1 True or False: A Jammer only gets the ghost points for opposing players in the penalty box when they score on blockers, as opposed to when they score on either blockers or the opposing Jammer.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1 Team A has one Blocker in the penalty box. Team B's Jammer is on their scoring pass and has yet to score, then laps (scores on) Team A's Jammer who is at the back of the pack and has yet to complete their initial pass. How many points does Team B's Jammer get?

  1. One [Correct]
  2. Two
  3. Three
  4. None

Note: A Jammer only gets the ghost points for players in the penalty box when they score on Blockers.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.1 Red blocker 1 is given a major penalty but has not yet left the track when Blue jammer scores their first point of the pass on Red blocker 2. How many points does the jammer earn?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.1 If Blue team has two blockers in the penalty box and Red jammer scores on a Blue blocker, how many points is the jammer awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3 [Correct]
  4. 4
  5. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.2 A team accidentally forgets to field a jammer. The opposing jammer scores their first point of a scoring pass, how many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 3
  3. 2 [Correct]
  4. 4

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.2 A team accidentally only fields 3 Blockers. The opposing Jammer scores their first point of a scoring pass (assume this is on a Blocker), how many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4
  5. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.2 A team accidentally only fields 2 Blockers and a Jammer. The opposing Jammer scores their first point of a scoring pass (assume this is on a Blocker), how many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3 [Correct]
  4. 4
  5. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.3 A player who has not been scored on removes themselves from play whilst the opposing jammer is still in the pack and has already scored on a Blocker. What happens?

  1. The opposing jammer is immediately awarded another point [Correct]
  2. The opposing jammer doesn't gain any extra points
  3. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the pack
  4. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the engagement zone

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.3 A player removes themselves from play. The opposing Jammer scores their first point of a scoring pass, how many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 3
  3. 2 [Correct]
  4. 4

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.4 A player who has not been scored on is sent to the penalty box whilst the opposing jammer is still in the pack and has already scored. What happens?

  1. The opposing jammer is immediately awarded another point [Correct]
  2. The opposing jammer doesn't gain any extra points
  3. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the pack
  4. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the engagement zone

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.4 An opposing skater is sent to the penalty box, the jammer then scores their first point of their scoring pass (assume this is on a blocker). How many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4
  5. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.1.5 True or False: When a jammer scores for the first time on a scoring pass, they are awarded a point for each opposing skater returning from the penalty box behind them.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.2 True or False: A Jammer (who has yet to score) has to pass blockers returning from the penalty box in front of them in order to score on them.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.2 True or False: When a jammer scores for the first time on their scoring pass, they gain a point for each opposing skater returning from the penalty box in front of them.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Note: If a skater is returning and is ahead of the jammer, they will already have returned to the pack when the jammer scores their first point.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.3 A jammer scores on two opposing blockers and is then sent to the penalty box. An opposing skater not yet scored on is sent to the penalty box. The jam ends before either leaves the penalty box. When does the penalized jammer get a point for the penalised blocker?

  1. Immediatly
  2. They don't [Correct]
  3. When they next score on an on-track skater during the next jam
  4. When they leave the penalty box in the next jam
  5. When they have legally returned in bounds in the next jam

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.1.3 A Jammer scores on two opposing blockers and is then sent to the penalty box. An opposing skater not yet scored on is sent to the penalty box. When does the penalized Jammer get a point for the penalised blocker?

  1. When they next score on an on-track skater during the same jam
  2. When they next pass the penalized skater during the same jam
  3. When they have served their penalty time during the same jam
  4. They don't
  5. When they have legally returned in bounds during the same jam [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.1

8.5.2 When are Jammer scores announced?

  1. Immediately when they are earned
  2. Once the Jammer has cleared the foremost pack skater by 10 feet (3 meters)
  3. Once the Jammer has cleared the foremost pack skater
  4. Once the Jammer has cleared the engagement zone [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.2 When does a Jammer Referee announce points awarded to a Jammer?

  1. when the Jammer is about to begin their next scoring pass.
  2. when the Jammer leaves the engagement zone. [Correct]
  3. when the Jammer clears the pack.
  4. when the Jammer passes each Blocker legally and in-bounds.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.2 A team accidentally forget to field a jammer. The opposing jammer scores their first point of a scoring pass, how many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 3
  3. 2 [Correct]
  4. 4

8.5.2 Red blocker 1 is given a major penalty but has not yet left the track when Blue jammer scores their first point of the pass on Red blocker 2. How many points does the jammer earn?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4

8.5.2 A team accidentally only fields 2 Blockers and a Jammer. The opposing Jammer scores their first point of a scoring pass (assume this is on a Blocker), how many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3 [Correct]
  4. 4
  5. 5

8.5.2 A team accidentally only field 3 blockers. The opposing jammer scores their first point of a scoring pass (assume this is on a blocker), how many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4
  5. 5

8.5.2.1 True or False: If a jammer failed to score on an opponent and has completed their pass, they can drop back and re-pass the opponent to get another point.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.2

8.5.3 A Jammer can continue to score points until ...

  1. the last of the fourth whistle of the jam-ending signal [Correct]
  2. the first of the fourth whistle of the jam-ending signal

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.3 When does a jammer stop earning points?

  1. When they repeatedly place their hands on their hips
  2. On the first of four short whistles
  3. On the fourth of four short whistles [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.3.1 A player who has not been scored on removes themselves from play whilst the opposing jammer is still in the pack and has already scored. What happens?

  1. The opposing jammer is immediately awarded another point [Correct]
  2. The opposing jammer doesn't gain any extra points
  3. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the pack
  4. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the engagement zone

8.5.4 If a Jammer is still in the pack when a jam ends...

  1. They get no points
  2. Any points they have earned are immediately announced [Correct]
  3. Any points they have earned roll over to the next jam

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.4 An opposing skater is sent to the penalty box, the jammer then scores their first point of their scoring pass (assume this is on a blocker). How many points are they awarded?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4
  5. 5

8.5.4.1 True or False: At the end of the jam the Jammer will score on Blockers ahead of the Engagement Zone who were not previously scored upon during that scoring pass.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.4

8.5.4.1 If a Jammer is still in the pack and on a scoring pass when a jam ends, and there are blockers ahead of the engagement zone who the Jammer has not scored on ...

  1. The jammer does not get points for these blockers
  2. The jammer gets point for these blockers [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.4

8.5.4.1 A player who has not been scored on is sent to the penalty box whilst the opposing jammer is still in the pack and has already scored. What happens?

  1. The opposing jammer is immediately awarded another point [Correct]
  2. The opposing jammer doesn't gain any extra points
  3. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the pack
  4. The opposing jammer is awarded another point after they leave the engagement zone

8.5.5 True or False: Once a Jammer legally earns a point, it can never be taken away.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.5 True or False: When a jammer scores for the first time on a scoring pass, they are awarded a point for each opposing skater returning from the penalty box behind them.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

8.5.5.1 If a Jammer Referee mistakenly awards a Jammer an extra point, can the point be taken away?

  1. Yes [Correct]
  2. No

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.5

8.5.5.1 If a scoreboard operator mistakenly awards a team an extra point, can the point be taken away?

  1. Yes [Correct]
  2. No

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.5

8.5.5.1 True or False: When a jammer scores for the first time on their scoring pass, they gain a point for each opposing skater returning from the penalty box in front of them.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Note: If a skater is returning and is ahead of the jammer, they will already have returned to the pack when the jammer scores their first point.

8.5.5.1 True or False: A Jammer (who has yet to score) has to pass blockers returning from the penalty box in front of them in order to score on them.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

8.5.6 True or False: A Jammer can score when in the penalty box

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.6 A jammer scores on two opposing blockers and is then sent to the penalty box. An opposing skater not yet scored on is sent to the penalty box. The jam ends before either leaves the penalty box. When does the penalized jammer get a point for the penalised blocker?

  1. When they next score on an on-track skater during the same jam
  2. When they next pass the penalized skater during the same jam
  3. When they have served their penalty time during the same jam
  4. They don't [Correct]
  5. When they have legally returned in bounds during the same jam

Note: If the jammer never returns to the track, they can never get the "ghost point" for the penalized blocker.

8.5.6 True or False: A Jammer can score from the penalty box if opposing skaters move clockwise.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.6 A Jammer scores on two opposing blockers and is then sent to the penalty box. An opposing skater not yet scored on is sent to the penalty box. When does the penalized Jammer get a point for the penalised blocker?

  1. When they next score on an on-track skater during the same jam
  2. When they next pass the penalized skater during the same jam
  3. When they have served their penalty time during the same jam
  4. They don't
  5. When they have legally returned in bounds during the same jam [Correct]

8.5.6.1 A Jammer passes opposing blockers A and B, and is then sent to the penalty box. When they exit the penalty box (in the same jam) can they then score on blockers A and B this pass?

  1. Yes
  2. No [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.6

8.5.6.1 A Jammer passes opposing blocker A and B and is sent to the penalty box. When they exit the penalty box which blockers can they score on?

  1. A, B, C and D
  2. Only A and B
  3. Only C and D [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.6

8.5.6.2 If a jammer scores on every blocker and is sent to the penalty box before their pass finishes, what pass are they on when they exit the penalty box (assuming they exit in the same jam)?

  1. A new one, and can score on all blockers again
  2. The same one, and can't score on any blockers again [Correct]
  3. The same one, and can score on all blockers again
  4. A new one, and can't score on any blockers again

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.6

8.5.6.3 A Jammer scores on every blocker but is then sent to the penalty box before their pass finishes. The jam ends and a new jam begins with the Jammer still in the penalty box. What pass are they on when they exit the penalty box?

  1. The same pass
  2. A new pass, but not their initial pass for this jam
  3. A new pass, also their initial pass for this jam [Correct]

Note: If it's a new jam, we start again with the passes making this now the jammer's initial pass

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5.6

8.5.7 If Jammer A laps opposing Jammer B, how many points does Jammer A score?

  1. None
  2. 1 [Correct]
  3. 2
  4. 3
  5. 4
  6. 5

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.5.8 To score points whilst airborne a Jammer ...

  1. can land anywhere
  2. must land in bounds [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/8.5

8.6.1 True or False: A Jammer can't score on an opponent who is out of play.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

8.6.1 True or False: A Jammer can score on an opponent who has been knocked to the floor?

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

8.6.2 When are Jammer scores announced?

  1. Immediately when they are earned
  2. Once the Jammer has cleared the foremost pack skater
  3. Once the Jammer has cleared the engagement zone [Correct]
  4. Once the Jammer has cleared the foremost pack skater by 10 feet

8.6.2 When does a jam ref announce points awarded to a Jammer?

  1. when the Jammer is about to begin their next scoring pass.
  2. when the Jammer leaves the engagement zone. [Correct]
  3. when the Jammer clears the pack.
  4. when the Jammer passes each Blocker legally and in-bounds.

8.6.2.1 True or False: If a jammer failed to score on an opponent and has completed their pass, they can drop back and re-pass the opponent to get another point.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

8.6.3 If a Jammer is still in the pack when a jam ends...

  1. They get no points
  2. Any points they have earned are immediately announced [Correct]
  3. Any points they have earned roll over to the next jam

8.6.3.1 If a Jammer is still in the pack when a jam ends and there are blockers ahead of the engagement zone ...

  1. The jammer does not get points for these blockers
  2. The jammer gets point for these blockers [Correct]

8.6.4 True or False: Once a Jammer legally earns a point, it can never be taken away.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

8.6.4.1 If a scoreboard operator mistakenly awards a team an extra point, can the point be taken away?

  1. Yes [Correct]
  2. No

8.6.4.1 If a Jam ref mistakenly awards a jammer an extra point, can the point be taken away?

  1. Yes [Correct]
  2. No

8.6.5 A Jammer passes opposing blocker A and B and is sent to the penalty box. When they exit the penalty box which blockers can they score on?

  1. A, B, C and D
  2. Only A and B
  3. Only C and D [Correct]

8.6.5 A Jammer passes opposing blockers A and B, and is then sent to the penalty box. When they exit the penalty box (in the same jam) can they then score on blockers A and B this pass?

  1. Yes
  2. No [Correct]

8.6.5.1 If a jammer scores on every blocker and is sent to the penalty box before their pass finishes, what pass are they on when they exit the penalty box (assuming they exit in the same jam)?

  1. A new one, and can score on all blockers again
  2. The same one, and can't score on any blockers again [Correct]
  3. The same one, and can score on all blockers again
  4. A new one, and can't score on any blockers again

8.6.5.2 A Jammer scores on every blocker but is then sent to the penalty box before their pass finishes. The jam ends and a new jam begins with them still in the penalty box. What pass are they on when they exit the penalty box?

  1. The same one, and can't score on any blockers again
  2. The same one, and can score on all blockers again
  3. A new one, also their initial one for this jam, and can't score on any blockers [Correct]
  4. A new one, also their initial one for this jam, and can score on all blockers again

Note: If it's a new jam, we start again with the passes making this now the jammer's initial pass

8.6.6 If Jammer A laps opposing Jammer B, how many points does Jammer A score?

  1. None
  2. 1 [Correct]
  3. 2
  4. 3
  5. 4
  6. 5

8.6.7 True or False: At the end of the jam the Jammer will score on Blockers ahead of the Engagement Zone who were not previously scored upon during that scoring pass.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

8.6.8 When does a jammer stop earning points?

  1. When they repeatedly place their hands on their hips
  2. On the first of four short whistles
  3. On the fourth of four short whistles [Correct]

8.6.9 To score points whilst airborne a jammer ...

  1. must land in bounds [Correct]
  2. can land anywhere

8.6.10 True or False: A Jammer can score from the penalty box if opposing skaters move clockwise

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

8.6.10 True or False: A Jammer can score when in the penalty box

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

9.1.1 Each bout will have no less than _____ skating referees and no more than _____ referees total.

  1. Five / Ten
  2. Two / Four
  3. Six / Nine
  4. Four / Eight
  5. Three / Seven [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.1 What's the minimum number of skating referees required?

  1. 5
  2. 4
  3. 2
  4. 1
  5. There is no minimum
  6. 3 [Correct]
  7. 7

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.1.1 True or False: All referees must be on skates.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.1

9.1.1.1 True or False: All referees must be on skates.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

9.1.1.2 True or False: In tournament play each bout must have at least one WFTDA Certified Referee.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.1

9.1.1.2 In an official WFTDA tournament, how many referees must be WFTDA Certified (at a minimum)?

  1. There is no minimum number
  2. 7
  3. 6
  4. 5
  5. 4
  6. 3
  7. 2
  8. 1 [Correct]
  9. None

Note: If the event isn't an official WFTDA tournament and is a single bout, the rules "strongly encourage" there to be a WFTDA Certified ref. However, for a tournament there must be one WFTDA Certified ref in each game.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.1

9.1.2 Who is the ultimate authority in the game?

  1. Head Referee [Correct]
  2. Head NSO
  3. Inside Pack Referee
  4. Jammer Referee
  5. Outside Pack Referee

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.2 True or False: The Head Referee is the ultimate authority in the game

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

9.1.2.1 Who is the only referee with the authority to expel a skater, manager, or coach?

  1. Outside Pack Referee
  2. Jam Referee
  3. Head NSO
  4. Head Referee [Correct]
  5. Inside Pack Referee

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.2

9.1.2.1 True or False: Any referee can expel a skater, manager or coach

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.2

9.1.3 True or False: Each Team must have one Jammer Referee designated.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.3 Which referee(s) is/are primarily responsible for observing Jammer(s).

  1. Jammer Referee [Correct]
  2. Outside Pack Referee
  3. Inside Pack Referee
  4. Head Referee
  5. Head NSO

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.3.1 Jammer Referees wear ...

  1. Nothing special
  2. A clear identifier corresponding to their designated team colours [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.3

9.1.3.1 Who wears an identifier (wrist band, sash, helmet cover, etc.) corresponding to team colors to indicate the team for which the referee is responsible.

  1. Team Captain
  2. Outside Pack Referee
  3. Head Referee
  4. Jammer Referee [Correct]
  5. Team Manager
  6. Team Coach

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.3

9.1.3.2 True or False: At the end of a period, the Jammer Referees DO NOT switch the team for which they are responsible and the identifier corresponding to each team.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.3

9.1.3.2 True or False: At the end of the first period Jammer Referees must switch the team they are responsible for.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.3

9.1.4 What is the primary responsibility of the Pack Referees?

  1. define the pack
  2. stay out of the Jammer Referee skating path
  3. call penalties [Correct]
  4. observe the pack [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.4 The primary responsibility for Pack Referees is ...

  1. Calling penalties [Correct]
  2. Keeping track of points scored by a jammer
  3. Communicating penalties to the crowd

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.4.1 How many Pack referees can be stationed inside the track?

  1. No more than two [Correct]
  2. No more than one
  3. There is no limit
  4. No more than three
  5. None

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.4

9.1.4.1 What's the largest number of Pack Referees who may be stationed inside the track?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 4
  4. 3

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.4

9.1.5 Which NSO's are not officially required?

  1. Outside Whiteboard Operator [Correct]
  2. Jam Timer
  3. Scorekeepers
  4. Penalty Trackers
  5. Penalty Timing Officials
  6. Scoreboard Operator
  7. Inside Whiteboard Operator [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1

9.1.5.1 The role of the Scorekeepers is...

  1. To record the points reported by the Jammer referees [Correct]
  2. To record the penalties reported by the referees
  3. To keep track of the official penalty tally
  4. To time penalties
  5. To assist referees in ensuring a team skates short when they ought
  6. To post the score and penalties to the scoreboard
  7. To start jams
  8. To time 30 seconds between jams
  9. To end a jam that has run for 2 minutes

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.1 What is the fewest number of scorekeeper(s) a game will have?

  1. 1
  2. 2 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.1 Who records points reported by the Jammer Referees and keeps the official score.

  1. Scoreboard Operator
  2. Scorekeeper [Correct]
  3. Penalty Tracker
  4. Penalty Timing Officials
  5. Jam Timer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.2 Who is responsible for recording penalties reported by referees and keeping track of the official penalty tally?

  1. Penalty Timing Official
  2. Penalty Tracker [Correct]
  3. Jam Timer
  4. Scoreboard Operator
  5. Scorekeeper

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.2 What is the fewest number of Penalty Tracker(s) will a game have?

  1. 1 [Correct]
  2. 2
  3. 3
  4. 4

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.2 The role of the Penalty Trackers is...

  1. To record the points reported by the Jammer referees
  2. To record the penalties reported by the referees [Correct]
  3. To keep track of the official penalty tally [Correct]
  4. To time penalties
  5. To assist referees in ensuring a team skates short when they ought
  6. To post the score and penalties to the scoreboard
  7. To start jams
  8. To time 30 seconds between jams
  9. To end a jam that has run for 2 minutes

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.3 Who is responsible for timing penalties and assist referees in ensuring a team skates short when they ought.

  1. Scoreboard Operator
  2. Penalty Timing Official [Correct]
  3. Penalty Tracker
  4. Jam Timer
  5. Scorekeeper

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.3 What is the fewest number of Penalty Timing Official(s) will a game have to oversee the penalty box?

  1. 2 [Correct]
  2. 3
  3. 4
  4. 1

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.3 The role of the Penalty Timing Officials is...

  1. To post the score and penalties to the scoreboard
  2. To assist referees in ensuring a team skates short when they should [Correct]
  3. To time penalties [Correct]
  4. To keep track of the official penalty tally
  5. To record the penalties reported by the referees
  6. To record the points reported by the Jammer referees
  7. To start jams
  8. To time 30 seconds between jams
  9. To end a jam that has run for 2 minutes

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.4 Who is responsible for posting the score from the scorekeeper, and posting penalties from the penalty tracker, to the scoreboard.

  1. Scoreboard Operator [Correct]
  2. Penalty Tracker
  3. Jammer Referee
  4. Penalty Timing Officials
  5. Scorekeeper
  6. Jam Timer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.4 Who is responsible to post scores from the scorekeeper and post penalties from the penalty tracker?

  1. Scoreboard Operator [Correct]
  2. Penalty Tracker
  3. Jammer Referee
  4. Penalty Timing Officials
  5. Scorekeeper
  6. Jam Timer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.4 How many scoreboard operator(s) will a game have?

  1. 2
  2. 1 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.4 The role of the Scoreboard Operator is...

  1. To record the points reported by the Jammer referees
  2. To record the penalties reported by the referees
  3. To keep track of the official penalty tally
  4. To time penalties
  5. To assist referees in ensuring a team skates short when they ought
  6. To post the score and penalties to the scoreboard [Correct]
  7. To start jams
  8. To time 30 seconds between jams
  9. To end a jam that has run for 2 minutes

Note: Some scoreboard software (though rarely used) does display penalty information.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.5 What are the responsibilities of a Jam Timer?

  1. timing team timeouts
  2. starting the jam [Correct]
  3. timing thirty seconds between jams [Correct]
  4. ending jams that run the full two minutes [Correct]
  5. keep a backup period clock
  6. track team timeouts
  7. timing official timeouts

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.5 The role of the Jam Timer is...

  1. To record the points reported by the Jammer referees
  2. To record the penalties reported by the referees
  3. To keep track of the official penalty tally
  4. To time penalties
  5. To assist referees in ensuring a team skates short when they ought
  6. To post the score and penalties to the scoreboard
  7. To start jams [Correct]
  8. To time 30 seconds between jams [Correct]
  9. To end a jam that has run for 2 minutes [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.1.5.5 How many Jam Timer(s) will a game have?

  1. 2
  2. 1 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 4

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.1.5

9.2.1.1 True or False: Referees are responsible for determining that both teams have the correct number of skaters in the jam.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.1

9.2.1.1.1 If the jam starts and there are too many skaters, the referees must ...

  1. whistle the jam dead immediately
  2. send the Blocker who last entered the track back to their bench [Correct]
  3. allow the jam to continue

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.1

9.2.1.1.2 If the jam starts and there are too many skaters, and the referees can't pull a skater off the track for some reason, they must ...

  1. keep trying to pull a skater off the track
  2. stop the jam [Correct]
  3. allow the jam to continue

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.1

9.2.1.1.3 True or False: Referees can warn teams when too many skaters line up on the track.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.1

9.2.1.1.4 True or False: A referee will not warn a skater who is lining up out of position (a Blocker lining up in front of the Pivot line, for example).

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.1

9.2.1.2 Referees have a duty to ensure that the skaters are wearing ...

  1. some, but not all, required safety equipment
  2. the correct skater designations [Correct]
  3. the correct uniforms [Correct]
  4. all required safety equipment [Correct]
  5. toe stops on their skates
  6. helmet panties
  7. suitable make-up

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.1

9.2.1.3 Who has a duty to determine that skaters are in proper formation at the start of the jam?

  1. Jammers
  2. Pivots
  3. All skaters
  4. Coaches
  5. Referees [Correct]
  6. Blockers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.1

9.2.2.1 Who has a duty to whistle the start of the pack?

  1. Officials [Correct]
  2. Coaches
  3. Pivots
  4. All skaters
  5. Jammers
  6. Blockers

9.2.2.1 Who has a duty to whistle the start of the jam?

  1. Blockers
  2. Jammers
  3. All skaters
  4. Pivots
  5. Coaches
  6. Officials [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.2

9.2.2.2 Who has a duty to whistle the start of the Jammers?

  1. Jammers
  2. Pivots
  3. All skaters
  4. Coaches
  5. Officials [Correct]
  6. Blockers

9.2.3.1 How is Lead Jammer status indicated?

  1. Pointing at the Lead Jammer and two short whistle blasts [Correct]
  2. Pointing at the Lead Jammer and four short whistle blasts
  3. Pointing at the Lead Jammer and one short whistle blast
  4. Pointing at the Lead Jammer and no whistle blasts
  5. two short whistle blasts
  6. four short whistle blasts

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.3

9.2.3.1 How is Lead Jammer status indicated?

  1. official hand signal and two short whistle blasts [Correct]
  2. official hand signal and four short whistle blasts
  3. official hand signal and one short whistle blast
  4. official hand signal
  5. two short whistle blasts
  6. four short whistle blasts

9.2.3.1 Who has a duty to assign Lead Jammer status?

  1. Referees [Correct]
  2. Coaches
  3. All skaters
  4. Pivots
  5. Jammers
  6. Blockers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.3

9.2.3.2 How long does a jammer referee point at the Lead Jammer?

  1. until the end of the jam [Correct]
  2. until the end of the initial pass
  3. until the end of the first scoring pass
  4. until the end of the period
  5. the jammer referee does not point at the Lead Jammer

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.3

9.2.4 Who is responsible for counting and signaling score?

  1. Jammer referees [Correct]
  2. The Head Referee
  3. Pack referees
  4. A designated NSO

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2

9.2.5 What is the number one priority for Referees?

  1. Safety [Correct]
  2. Fun
  3. Score
  4. Penalties
  5. Looking good

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2

9.2.5.1 What hand signals will Referees use?

  1. officially designated hand signals [Correct]
  2. any clear hand signals
  3. any clear designated hand signals

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.5

9.2.5.2 Referees will:

  1. Use officiating numbers when calling a penalty to a skater
  2. Vocally call out minor penalties [Correct]
  3. Exclusively use a skater's team color and charter number for calling penalties on that skater [Correct]
  4. Perform hand signals for all penalties [Correct]
  5. Whistle, hand signal and vocally call out all major penalties [Correct]
  6. Use charter names when talking about a skater
  7. Use other abbreviations or systems outside of a skater’s number and team color

9.2.5.2 Referees will:

  1. Use charter names when talking about a skater
  2. Whistle, hand signal and vocally call out all major penalties [Correct]
  3. Perform hand signals for all penalties [Correct]
  4. Exclusively use a skater's team color and charter number for calling penalties on that skater [Correct]
  5. Use officiating numbers when calling a penalty to a skater
  6. Use other abbreviations or systems outside of a skater's number and team color

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.5

9.2.5.3 Referees will not:

  1. Use charter names [Correct]
  2. Whistle, hand signal and vocally call out all major penalties
  3. Perform hand signals for all penalties
  4. Use officiating numbers [Correct]
  5. Exclusively use a skater's team color and charter number for calling penalties on that skater
  6. Use other abbreviations or systems outside of a skater's number and team color [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.5

9.2.5.3 Referees will not:

  1. Use officiating numbers [Correct]
  2. Vocally call out minor penalties
  3. Exclusively use a skater's team color and charter number for calling penalties on that skater
  4. Perform hand signals for all penalties
  5. Whistle, hand signal and vocally call out all major penalties
  6. Use charter names [Correct]
  7. Use other abbreviations or systems outside of a skater’s number and team color [Correct]

9.2.6.1 Under which of the following situations might a referee call off a jam?

  1. A skater is Injured [Correct]
  2. An Official Timeout is called [Correct]
  3. In response to a major penalty [Correct]
  4. If they're tired
  5. Too many skaters on the track giving one team a competitive advantage [Correct]
  6. Too few skaters on the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.6

9.2.6.2 Under which of the following situations MUST a referee call off a jam?

  1. An injury which is a safety hazard [Correct]
  2. Technical difficulty which is a safety hazard [Correct]
  3. In response to a major penalty
  4. If they're tired
  5. Too many skaters on the track giving one team a competitive advantage [Correct]
  6. Too few skaters on the track
  7. Fighting [Correct]
  8. Fans on the track interfering with continued play [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.6

9.2.6.3 If a referee calls off a jam prior to its natural conclusion with time remaining on the jam clock, but not on the period clock...

  1. points from the jam will remain and a new jam may be played at the Head Referee's discretion [Correct]
  2. points from the jam will remain and a new jam must be played
  3. points from the jam will be removed and a new jam may be played at the Head Referee's discretion
  4. points from the jam will be removed and a new jam must be played

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.6

9.2.7.1.1 If a team has five or fewer skaters able to play ...

  1. The Head Referee may call a forfeit [Correct]
  2. The game will continue
  3. Un-rostered skaters may be able to join the team

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.7

9.2.7.1.2 If a team refuses to field skaters ...

  1. The Head Referee may call a forfeit. [Correct]
  2. The game continues and is boring.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.7

9.2.7.2.1 If a team fails to show up to a WFTDA sanctioned bout ...

  1. The Head Referee must call a forfeit. [Correct]
  2. The game is played with another team.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.7

9.2.7.2.2 True or False: A team can elect to forfeit rather than continue play.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.7

9.2.8 True or False: Referees may break up fights at their discretion.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2

9.2.9 Who has the option of calling an Official Timeout?

  1. Referees [Correct]
  2. Coaches
  3. Skaters
  4. Pivots
  5. Jammers

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2

9.2.10 If there is a disagreement regarding a referee's call or scoring who can discuss the ruling with the referees?

  1. Captains or their Designated Alternates [Correct]
  2. Captains or Coaches
  3. Only Coaches
  4. Nobody
  5. Anybody
  6. Captains, Designated Alternates or Pivots

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2

9.2.11.1 How is an Official Review requested?

  1. A Captain or Designated Alternate asks for a Timeout [Correct]
  2. Any skater asks for a Timeout
  3. Any coach asks for a Timeout

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.11

9.2.11.2 To allow an Official Review the Head Referee may ...

  1. wait until the end of the final period
  2. wait until the end of the game
  3. wait until the end of the period [Correct]
  4. take an "Official Timeout" [Correct]
  5. grant a team timeout [Correct]

9.2.11.3 During an Official Review ...

  1. The Head Referee conferences with one Captain
  2. All Referees conference with both Captains
  3. All Referees conference with one Captain
  4. The Head Referee conferences with Captains from both teams [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.11

9.2.11.3 During an Official Review ...

  1. All Referees conference with one Captain
  2. All Referees conference with both Captains [Correct]
  3. The Head Referee conferences with one Captain
  4. The Head Referee conferences with both Captains

9.2.11.3 Who initiates and explains the grievance during an Official Review?

  1. The Head Ref
  2. The Captain or Designated Alternative [Correct]
  3. The Captain [Correct]
  4. The skater in question

Note: The rules in 9.2.11 only mention Captains (other than 9.2.11.1) as able to confer with referees, but both the glossary and rule 9.2.10 say that the Designated Alternate and the Captain may confer with referees.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.11

9.2.11.4 Who investigates the grievance during an Official Review?

  1. The Captain
  2. The Captain or Designated Alternative
  3. The Head Referee [Correct]
  4. The skater in question

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.11

9.2.11.4 Who explains the grievance during an Official Review?

  1. The Head Ref
  2. The Captain or Designated Alternative [Correct]
  3. The Captain [Correct]
  4. The skater in question

9.2.11.5 The Head Referee's decision, with regards to Official Reviews ...

  1. Is final [Correct]
  2. Can be challenged
  3. Can be appealed
  4. Can be ignored

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2.11

9.2.11.5 Who investigates the grievance during an Official Review?

  1. The Captain
  2. The Captain or Designated Alternative
  3. The Head Referee [Correct]
  4. The skater in question

9.2.11.6 The Head Referee's decision, with regard to an Official Reviews ...

  1. Is final [Correct]
  2. Can be challenged
  3. Can be appealed
  4. Can be ignored

9.2.12 How many Official Reviews does a team get?

  1. One per period [Correct]
  2. One per game
  3. Two per period
  4. There is no limit
  5. Three per game

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2

9.2.13 True or False: Only the immediately preceding jam is subject to Official Review

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.2

9.3.1 True or False: A referee may not decrease the severity of a penalty at their discretion.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.1 True or False: A referee may increase the severity of a penalty at their discretion.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.1 If something happens and there's no rule about it, what happens?

  1. The action is always legal
  2. The consensus of the referees will be the final decision on the matter [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.1.1 True or False: In general a warning has to be issued in order for a penalty to be given.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3.1

9.3.1.1 True or False: Issuing penalties takes priority over issuing warnings.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3.1

9.3.1.1 True or False: Issuing penalties takes priority over issuing warnings.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3.1

9.3.1.2 True or False: Referee discretion is intended ONLY to allow referees to keep the game safe, fair, and consistent in the event that an unexpected situation arises.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3.1

9.3.1.2 Referee discretion is to allow referees to ...

  1. keep the game safe [Correct]
  2. keep the game fair [Correct]
  3. keep the game constant in the event of an unexpected situation [Correct]
  4. change the rules
  5. help a team out
  6. help an individual skater

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3.1

9.3.2 True or False: If the referee is in doubt on a call, i.e. the referee sees the effects of a hit but does not see the action, a penalty must not be called.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.2 If the referee is in doubt on a call ...

  1. they must call a penalty
  2. they must not call a penalty [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.3 True or False: If the referee is in a position where intent must be inferred but is not clear, an illegal intent must be presumed.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.3 If a referee is in a position where intent can only be inferred, but it's not clear ...

  1. they must presume legal intent [Correct]
  2. they must presume illegal intent

9.3.4 True or False: If the referee is not sure whether an action warrants a major or a no impact/no penalty, it must be called as a major penalty.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.4 If a referee isn't sure if an action should get a minor penalty or a no impact/no penalty ...

  1. they must call a no impact/no penalty [Correct]
  2. they must call a minor penalty

9.3.5 If a referee isn't sure if an action should get a minor penalty or a major penalty ...

  1. it must be called as a minor penalty [Correct]
  2. it must be called as a major penalty

9.3.5 True or False: If the referee is not sure whether an action warrants an expulsion or a major, it must be called as a major.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.3

9.3.6 If a referee isn't sure if an action should get a major penalty or an expulsion ...

  1. it must be called as a major penalty [Correct]
  2. it must be called as an expulsion

9.4.1 True or False: Referees are permitted to wear inline skates.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.1 True or False: Referees are permitted to only wear inline skates and are discouraged from wearing quad skates.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.2 True or False: Referees can wear whatever they want.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.2.1 True or False: Non-skating officials are strongly encouraged to dress in a striped uniform not differentiating themselves from referees.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4.2

9.4.2.1 Non-Skating Officials are strongly encouraged to...

  1. dress in an un-obtrusive uniform differentiating themselves from Referees [Correct]
  2. dress in an un-obtrusive uniform similar to the Referees
  3. dress in an exciting uniform
  4. officiate in the nude

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4.2

9.4.3 A referee may use any of the following as identification:

  1. Name [Correct]
  2. Number [Correct]
  3. Name and Number [Correct]
  4. Symbol
  5. Name and Symbol
  6. Number and Symbol
  7. Name, Number, and Symbol

Note: If a referee has a Name, that will be used as identification instead of their Number, so their Number in this case can have Symbols in

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.3 True or False: A referee must have a visible and clear identifier on their back.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.3 Which of the following could a referee use as their unique identification on their back.

  1. Name and no number [Correct]
  2. Name and number (the number has no restrictions) [Correct]
  3. Referees do not need to wear any identification on their back
  4. Only a number, with may contain letters and symbols
  5. Only a number, which must be between 1 and 4 numerical digits (no letters or symbols) [Correct]
  6. Only a number, which must be between 1 and 4 alpha-numeric digits

Note: If a Ref has a name and number, there's no restrictions on the number. However, if the ref only has a number, they can't have any letters in it.

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.3 True or False: Each referee participating in a bout must be visibly and clearly identified on the back of their jersey.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.3.3.1 If a referee chooses to be identified solely by a number, that number must be a numeral of no more than how many digit(s).

  1. 6
  2. 4 [Correct]
  3. 3
  4. 2
  5. 5
  6. 1

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4.3

9.4.4 True or False: Each referee will provide their own sports whistle.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

9.4.5 Which of the following safety equipment must a referee wear

  1. Helmet [Correct]
  2. Knee Pads [Correct]
  3. Wrist Guards [Correct]
  4. Elbow Pads [Correct]
  5. Shin guards
  6. Mouth Guard
  7. Finger Protection

9.4.5 Referees are required to wear the following safety equipment with hard protective shells or inserts in addition to that which is required as a minimum by the liability insurer:

  1. Helmet [Correct]
  2. Knee Pads [Correct]
  3. Wrist Guards [Correct]
  4. Elbow Pads [Correct]
  5. Mouth Guard
  6. Shin Guard
  7. Chin Guard
  8. Fox 40 Classic

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/9.4

10.1.1 True or False: Protective gear must be worn while skating in a jam, including to and from the penalty box.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1

10.1.1 True or False: Protective gear must be worn while skating in a jam, including to and from the penalty box.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1

10.1.1 Failure to wear required protective gear or removal of protective gear, such as a mouth guard, will result in a/an:

  1. Major Penalty [Correct]
  2. No Impact / No Penalty
  3. Expulsion
  4. Fouling Out

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1

10.1.2 At a minimum, what does protective gear for a competing skater consist of?

  1. Wrist guards, elbow pads, knee pads, a helmet and a mouth guard [Correct]
  2. Knee pads, a helmet and a mouth guard
  3. Wrist guards, elbow pads, knee pads and a helmet
  4. Wrist guards, knee pads, a helmet and a mouth guard

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1

10.1.2 At a minimum protective gear shall include:

  1. Wrist Guards [Correct]
  2. Elbow Pads [Correct]
  3. Knee Pads [Correct]
  4. Mouth Guards [Correct]
  5. Helmets [Correct]
  6. Quad Skates
  7. Shin Guard
  8. Spine Guard
  9. Impact Shorts
  10. Gloves

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1

10.1.2 Which of the following protective gear is mandatory?

  1. padded shorts
  2. chin guards
  3. form fitting face shields
  4. shin guards
  5. turtle shell bras
  6. tailbone protectors
  7. helmet [Correct]
  8. mouth guard [Correct]
  9. wrist guards [Correct]
  10. knee pads [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1

10.1.2.1 True or False: Elbow pads don't need to have a hard protective shell or insert.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1.2

10.1.2.1 True or False: Minimum protective safety gear must have a hard shell or inserts.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1.2

10.1.2.1 True or False: Wrist guards don't need to have a hard protective shell or insert.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1.2

10.1.2.2 True or False: Skaters are strongly encouraged to secure or tape down loose Velcro on pads.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1.2

10.1.3 Which of the following protective gear is optional?

  1. padded shorts [Correct]
  2. chin guards [Correct]
  3. form fitting face shields [Correct]
  4. shin guards [Correct]
  5. turtle shell bras [Correct]
  6. tailbone protectors [Correct]
  7. helmet
  8. mouth guard
  9. wrist guards
  10. knee pads

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1

10.1.3.1 Which of the following protective gear may have a hard protective shell?

  1. finger protectors
  2. a groin cup
  3. shoulder pads
  4. shin guards [Correct]
  5. tailbone protectors [Correct]
  6. turtle shell bras [Correct]
  7. Chin guards [Correct]
  8. spine protectors
  9. non form-fitting clear full face shields [Correct]
  10. form-fitting face shields such as nose guards [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1.3

10.1.3.2 True or False: Cage style face shields are allowed to be worn as protective equipment.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1.3

10.1.3.2 True or False: Hockey style full face shields are allowed to be worn as protective equipment.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

10.1.3.3 True or False: If you're wearing a non-form fitting full or half face-shield, it must be designed for use on your specific brand and type of helmet.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.1.3

10.2.1 True or False: The hosting team must provide at least two licensed or certified medical professionals with expertise in emergency and urgent medical care.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.2

10.2.1 How many medics must a home team provide for a bout?

  1. At least 1
  2. At least 2 [Correct]
  3. There is no number
  4. At least 3

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.2

10.2.2 Captains are responsible for supplying medical personnel with their skaters' medical and/or emergency contact information as necessary.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.2

10.2.2 Who is responsible for supplying medical personnel with skaters' medical and/or emergency contact information?

  1. The Head Ref
  2. Captains [Correct]
  3. Coaches
  4. Individual skaters

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.2

10.3.1 How many jams must a skater sit out, if a jam is called off by a referee due to their injury?

  1. 1
  2. 2
  3. 3 [Correct]
  4. 4
  5. The rest of the period
  6. The rest of the game

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.1 If a skater sustains an injury serious enough that the referees call off the jam, the skater must

  1. sit out the next three jams [Correct]
  2. return to own bench
  3. be sent to the penalty box
  4. spend the rest of the bout in the stands
  5. be ask to leave the track

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.1.1 If a jam is called off by a referee due to a skater's injury for the second time, the skater must sit out ...

  1. the rest of the period [Correct]
  2. 4 jams
  3. 3 jams
  4. 2 jams
  5. 1 jam
  6. the rest of the game

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3.1

10.3.1.1 True or False: If more than one jam is called off due to injury for the same skater, the skater must sit out of the remainder of the period.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3.1

10.3.2 If a skater is bleeding, the skater may not participate in a bout until the bleeding has stopped.

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.2 True or False: If a skater is bleeding they can still participate in the bout.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.3 If the skater leaves the jam for injury or any other reason, the skater may re-enter the jam.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

10.3.3 If a skater leaves the jam during play for equipment issues, the skater may re-enter the jam once the issue has been resolved.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.3 Which of the following skaters may re-enter the jam in progress?

  1. A skater who removed themselves due to equipment malfunction [Correct]
  2. A skater who removed themselves due to injury
  3. Neither may re-enter

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.3.1 A skater who leaves the track due to equipment issues must re-enter the pack _______ and is subject to ________.

  1. anywhere / no penalty
  2. from the back / a major penalty [Correct]
  3. without addressing equipment issues / major penalty
  4. in front of a teammate / no penalty

10.3.3.1 A skater who removed themselves due to equipment malfunction must enter the pack from ...

  1. anywhere
  2. the front
  3. the rear [Correct]
  4. the side

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3.3

10.3.4 True or False: A skater may not wear an appliance, cast, or brace that causes a danger to other skaters (as determined by the Head Referee).

  1. False
  2. True [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.4 True or False: Skaters who are injured prior to the bout may play if they have received clearance from their doctor.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.4 True or False: A skater injured prior to a game can play if given clearance from their doctor.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3

10.3.4.1 True or False: A skater may wear a cast if the Head Referee determines it doesn't cause a danger to other skaters and the skater in question has received clearance from their doctor.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.3.4

10.4.1 Under the influence of which of the following may a skater participate in a bout:

  1. Excitement [Correct]
  2. Happiness [Correct]
  3. Narcotics
  4. Alcohol
  5. Illegal drugs

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.4

10.4.1 True or False: Skaters may participate in a bout while under the influence of alcohol, narcotics, or illegal drugs.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.4

10.4.2 True or False: Skaters may consume alcohol at bouts while wearing skates.

  1. False [Correct]
  2. True

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.4

10.4.2 True or False: Skaters may drink beer at bouts, whilst wearing skates.

  1. True
  2. False [Correct]

Link: http://wftda.com/rules/20130101/section/10.4

N/A True or False: "Sausage Roller" is a really clever and funny name for a Merby (Men's Derby) skater.

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

Note: NB: A "sausage roll" is a tasty snack popular in the UK. It's sausage meat rolled and baked in pastry. Yum.

N/A In which of the following situations is a skater considered out of bounds?

  1. When both skates are off the track (not airborne, just off the track) [Correct]
  2. When they are straddling the boundary line [Correct]
  3. When they are outside the engagement zone
  4. When they are "downed" (after a fall)

N/A The first rule of Roller Derby is:

  1. you always talk about Roller Derby [Correct]
  2. you do not talk about Roller Derby

N/A What does NSO stand for?

  1. Non-Skating Official [Correct]
  2. Needlessly-Sexy Official
  3. Nuisance-Surveillance Officer
  4. Non-Scoring Official
  5. Number-of-Skaters Official

N/A True or False: A "bout" is the same as a "game".

  1. True [Correct]
  2. False

N/A How awesome is Roller Derby?

  1. Very awesome [Correct]
  2. Not awesome

N/A Turn

  1. Left [Correct]
  2. Right

N/A Where is a skater who is said to be "touching the track exclusively outside the track boundary"?

  1. Inside the track boundary lines
  2. Straddling the track boundary lines
  3. Outside the track boundary lines (in the "ref lanes") [Correct]

Answer more questions

Log in or sign up. When logged in the site will track which sections of the rules you're good at, and which you need to brush up on.

Click here to be tested on only the rules which have been updated with the new WFTDA 2013 rule set

Generate a Rules Test | About, Disclaimer & Privacy Policy | Meow | Forum:

Android app on Google Play iOS app on iTunes Android app on Amazon for Kindle

This page was generated by the Roller Derby Test O'Matic